Panasonic Telephone Advanced Hybrid System User Manual
Advanced Hybrid System  
Installation Manual  
MODEL NO.  
KX-TA624  
Please read this manual before connecting  
the Advanced Hybrid System.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Precautions  
FOR YOUR SAFETY PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING TEXT CAREFULLY.  
This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience.  
A 5 amp fuse is fitted in this plug.  
Should the fuse need to be replaced please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 5  
amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.  
Check for the ASTA mark  
or the BSI mark  
on the body of the fuse.  
If the plug contains a removable fuse cover you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is  
replaced.  
If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained.  
A replacement fuse cover can be purchased from your local Panasonic Dealer.  
IF THE FITTED MOULDED PLUG IS UNSUITABLE FOR THE SOCKET OUTLET IN  
YOUR HOME THEN THE FUSE SHOULD BE REMOVED AND THE PLUG CUT OFF AND  
DISPOSED OF SAFELY.  
THERE IS A DANGER OF SEVERE ELECTRICAL SHOCK IF THE CUT OFF PLUG IS  
INSERTED INTO ANY 13 AMP SOCKET.  
If a new plug is to be fitted please observe the wiring code as shown below.  
If in any doubt please consult a qualified electrician.  
WARNING : THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE EARTHED.  
IMPORTANT : The wires in this mains leads are coloured in accordance with the following  
code:  
Green-and-yellow: Earth  
Blue:  
Brown:  
Neutral  
Live  
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the  
coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows.  
The wire which is coloured GREEN-AND-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the  
plug which is marked with the letter E or by the safety earth symbol  
GREEN-AND-YELLOW.  
or coloured GREEN or  
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the  
letter N or coloured BLACK.  
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the  
letter L or coloured RED.  
How to replace the fuse : Open the-fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse  
and fuse cover.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Precautions  
This equipment should be used on PSTN lines requiring 2-wire Loop calling unguarded clearing  
with Loop Disconnect or DTMF address signalling.  
The equipment must be connected to direct extension lines and a payphone should not be  
connected as an extension.  
Operation in Power Failure  
In the event of a power failure, two single line telephones connected to extension ports 01 and 09  
will be directly connected to the following Exchange lines:  
Exchange line 1 : extension port 01  
Exchange line 4 : extension port 09  
• Set the Dialling Mode (Tone or Pulse) of your telephone, according to the Exchange line.  
• 999 and 112 can be dialled on the apparatus for the purpose of making outgoing calls to the BT  
emergency (999) and (112) service.  
Satisfactory performance can not be guaranteed for every allowed combination of host and  
subsidiary apparatus.  
999 and 112 can be dialled on the apparatus after accessing the Exchange line for the purpose of  
making outgoing calls to the BT emergency (999) and (112) service.  
During dialling, this apparatus may tinkle the bells of other telephones using the same line. this  
is not a fault and we advise you not to call Fault Repair Service.  
‘Prevention of access by user. This apparatus is intended to be accessible only to authorised  
personnel. This apparatus must be installed in a locked room or similar environment, such that  
user access is prevented. Failure to prevent such user access will invalidate any approval given to  
this apparatus.’  
Caution:  
Do not push the PAUSE button more than twice following the initial access digit (or digits).  
Failure to comply with this requirement may result in unsatisfactory operation.  
Notice:  
This PBX should only be used on B•T lines on which specific BT services or facilities are  
provided.  
CAUTION  
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.  
Replace only with the same or equivalent type  
recommended by the manufacturer.  
Dispose of used batteries according to the  
manufacturer’s instructions.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Precautions  
• The apparatus is designed to be installed and operated under controlled conditions of ambient  
temperature and a relative humidity not greater than 60 %.  
• Avoid installing the apparatus in damp or humid environments, such as bathrooms or  
swimming pools.  
• The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing.  
• Keep the unit away from heating appliances and electrical noise generating devices such as  
fluorescent lamps, motors and televisions. These noise sources can interfere with the  
performance of the Advanced Hybrid System.  
• This unit should be kept free of dust, moisture, high temperature (more than 40 ˚C) and  
vibration, and should not be exposed to direct sunlight.  
• Never attempt to insert wires, pins, etc. into the vents or other holes of this unit.  
• If there is any trouble, disconnect the unit from the telephone line. Plug a single line  
telephone into the telephone line. If the telephone operates properly, do not reconnect your  
system to the line until the system has been repaired. If the telephone does not operate  
properly, chances are that the problem is in the telephone network, and not in your system.  
• Do not use benzine, thinner, or the like, or any abrasive powder to clean the cabinet. Wipe it  
with a soft cloth.  
WARNING  
THIS UNIT MAY ONLY BE INSTALLED AND SERVED BY QUALIFIED  
SERVICE PERSONNEL.  
WHEN A FAILURE OCCURS WHICH RESULTS IN THE INTERNAL PARTS  
BECOMING ACCESSIBLE, DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY CORD  
IMMEDIATELY AND RETURN THIS UNIT TO YOUR DEALER.  
DISCONNECT THE TELECOM CONNECTION BEFORE DISCONNECTING THE  
POWER CONNECTION PRIOR TO RELOCATING THE EQUIPMENT, AND  
RECONNECT THE POWER FIRST.  
THIS UNIT IS EQUIPPED WITH AN EARTHING CONTACT PLUG. FOR SAFETY  
REASONS THIS PLUG MUST ONLY BE CONNECTED TO AN EARTHING  
CONTACT SOCKET WHICH HAS BEEN INSTALLED ACCORDING TO  
REGULATIONS.  
THE POWER SUPPLY CORD IS USED AS THE MAIN DISCONNECT DEVICE,  
ENSURE THAT THE SOCKET-OUTLET IS LOCATED/INSTALLED NEAR THE  
EQUIPMENT AND IS EASILY ACCESSIBLE.  
TO PREVENT THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE  
THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Precautions  
For your future reference  
SERIAL NO.  
DATE OF PURCHASE  
(found on the bottom of the unit)  
NAME OF DEALER  
DEALER’S ADDRESS  
Note • This Installation Manual does not show the complete model number that indicates  
the country where your equipment should be used. The model number of your unit  
is found on the label affixed to the unit.  
MODEL NO. – – – – – – – –  
(label)  
APPROVED for connection to  
telecommunication systems  
specified in the instructions for  
use subject to the conditions set  
out in them.  
610186  
Warning:  
This is a Class A Product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in  
which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.  
This unit complies with the EU Directives.  
“Electrical equipment for use within certain voltage limits.”  
“Electromagnetic compatibility” (basic standard)  
“Electromagnetic compatibility” (amendment)  
“Marking”  
73 / 23 / EEC  
89 / 336 / EEC  
92 / 31 / EEC  
93 / 68 / EEC  
The CE mark on this unit certifies compliance with the above mentioned Directives.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Structure of the Manual  
This manual consists of the following sections:  
Section 1. Basic System Construction  
Provides general information on the system including connection diagrams.  
Section 2. Installation  
Contains the system installation and wiring instructions, as well as how to install the  
optional cards.  
Section 3. Features  
Describes the optional and programmable features in alphabetical order. It also provides  
information about the conditions, required System Programming, connection references,  
related features and operating instructions references for every feature.  
Section 4. System Programming  
Describes the steps required to assign features to extensions or to the system.  
Section 5. Appendix  
Provides specifications and the default values of the System Programming.  
Section 6. Troubleshooting  
Provides information for system and telephone troubleshooting.  
Section 7. Programming Tables  
Provides programming tables for user-programmed data.  
Description of the Symbols Mainly Used in this manual  
Additional information and conditions.  
!
☞
The feature or program references.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Section 1 Basic System Construction  
Section 2 Installation  
2.1 Before Installation................................................................................. 2-2  
2.2 Unpacking .............................................................................................. 2-4  
2.3 Names and Locations............................................................................ 2-4  
2.4 Wall Mounting....................................................................................... 2-5  
2.5 Frame Ground Connection .................................................................. 2-6  
2.6 Opening the Top Front Cover.............................................................. 2-6  
2.7 Exchange Line Connection................................................................... 2-7  
2.8 Extension Connection ........................................................................... 2-10  
2.9 External Pager (Paging Equipment) Connection............................... 2-12  
2.10 External Music Connection.................................................................. 2-13  
2.11 Parallelled Telephone Connection ....................................................... 2-14  
2.12 Polarity Sensitive Telephone Connection............................................ 2-15  
2.13 Printer and PC Connection.................................................................. 2-16  
2.14 Location of Optional Cards.................................................................. 2-19  
2.15 OGM/FAX Detection Card Installation.............................................. 2-19  
2.16 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection.......................................... 2-21  
2.17 Installing a 3-CO Line & 8 Ext Expansion Card (KX-TA62477)  
and 8 SLT Extn. Expansion Card (KX-TA62474) ......................... 2-25  
2.18 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer............................. 2-30  
2.19 Securing the Cords................................................................................ 2-31  
2.20 Closing the Front Cover ....................................................................... 2-31  
2.21 Starting the System for the First Time ............................................... 2-32  
2.22 System Restart....................................................................................... 2-33  
2.23 System Data Clear................................................................................. 2-34  
Section 3 Features  
A
Absent Message Capability................................................................ 3-2  
Account Code Entry........................................................................... 3-3  
Alternate Calling – Ring/Voice .......................................................... 3-3  
Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On) ............................................... 3-4  
Automatic Exchange Line Access Number........................................ 3-4  
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)..................................................... 3-5  
Busy Extension Signalling ................................................................. 3-10  
Call Barring ........................................................................................ 3-11  
Call Barring — Extension Lock Boundary Class.............................. 3-13  
Call Barring for System Speed Dialling ........................................... 3-13  
Call Barring Override by Account Codes .......................................... 3-14  
Call Forwarding.................................................................................. 3-15  
Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection .................................. 3-15  
Call Park ............................................................................................. 3-16  
Call Pickup ......................................................................................... 3-17  
Call Splitting....................................................................................... 3-17  
B
C
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Call Transfer – to Exchange Line ...................................................... 3-18  
Call Transfer – to Extension............................................................... 3-18  
Call Waiting........................................................................................ 3-19  
Conference (3-party) .......................................................................... 3-20  
Conference (5-party) .......................................................................... 3-21  
Data Line Security.............................................................................. 3-21  
Date and Time Setting........................................................................ 3-22  
Direct In Line (DIL)........................................................................... 3-22  
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)............................................... 3-22  
Display Contrast Adjustment (KX-T7130 only)................................ 3-28  
Distinctive Dial Tones ........................................................................ 3-28  
Do Not Disturb (DND)....................................................................... 3-29  
Door Opener....................................................................................... 3-30  
Doorphone Call .................................................................................. 3-30  
DSS Console....................................................................................... 3-31  
Emergency Call .................................................................................. 3-32  
Exchange Line Ringing Selection...................................................... 3-32  
Executive Busy Override.................................................................... 3-33  
Extension Button Confirmation (KX-T7130 only)............................ 3-33  
Extension Feature Clear ..................................................................... 3-34  
Extension Group................................................................................. 3-35  
Extension Hunting.............................................................................. 3-36  
Extension Lock................................................................................... 3-36  
Extension Password / System Password ............................................ 3-37  
External Feature Access ..................................................................... 3-38  
Flexible Buttons.................................................................................. 3-39  
Handsfree Answerback....................................................................... 3-40  
Handsfree Operation........................................................................... 3-40  
Hold .................................................................................................... 3-40  
Host PBX Access................................................................................ 3-41  
Intercept Routing ............................................................................... 3-42  
Intercom Calling................................................................................. 3-42  
Language Selection ............................................................................ 3-43  
Limited Call Duration ........................................................................ 3-43  
Line Access Keys ............................................................................... 3-43  
Log-In/Log-Out .................................................................................. 3-44  
Message Waiting................................................................................. 3-45  
Microphone Mute............................................................................... 3-45  
Music on Hold / Background Music (BGM) ..................................... 3-46  
One-Touch Dialling ............................................................................ 3-46  
Operator / Manager Extension ........................................................... 3-47  
Operator Call ...................................................................................... 3-47  
Outgoing Message (OGM)................................................................. 3-48  
Outside Calling................................................................................... 3-52  
D
E
F
H
I
L
M
O
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
P
Paging ................................................................................................. 3-53  
Parallelled Telephone Connection...................................................... 3-54  
Personal Speed Dialling ..................................................................... 3-54  
Pickup Dialling................................................................................... 3-55  
Polarity Reverse Detection................................................................. 3-55  
Power Failure Transfer ....................................................................... 3-56  
Preferred Line Assignment — Incoming ........................................... 3-56  
Preferred Line Assignment — Outgoing............................................ 3-57  
Proprietary Telephone Setting Data Default Set ................................ 3-57  
Pulse to Tone Conversion................................................................... 3-58  
Recall.................................................................................................. 3-58  
Recall Button on a Single Line Telephone......................................... 3-59  
Receiving Calls................................................................................... 3-59  
Redial.................................................................................................. 3-60  
Ringing Pattern Selection................................................................... 3-60  
Room Monitor .................................................................................... 3-61  
Secret Dialling.................................................................................... 3-62  
Self-Extension Number Confirmation (KX-T7130 only).................. 3-62  
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)...................................... 3-63  
System Data Default Set .................................................................... 3-64  
System Speed Dialling ....................................................................... 3-65  
Timed Reminder................................................................................. 3-65  
Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service....................................................... 3-66  
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) ...................................................... 3-67  
Voice Mail Integration for KX-TVP100 ............................................ 3-71  
Volume Control ................................................................................. 3-74  
Walking COS...................................................................................... 3-74  
R
S
T
U
V
W
Section 4 System Programming  
4.1 Before System Programming ............................................................... 4-2  
4.2 System Programming............................................................................ 4-5  
[000] Date and Time Setting.............................................................. 4-5  
[001] System Speed Dialling Entry................................................... 4-5  
[002] System Password...................................................................... 4-6  
[003] DSS Console Port Assignment ................................................ 4-7  
[004] Paired Telephone Assignment for DSS Console...................... 4-7  
[005] One-Touch Transfer Using a DSS Button ............................... 4-8  
[006] Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Changing Mode ................. 4-8  
[007] Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Start Time .......................... 4-9  
[008] Operator Assignment .............................................................. 4-9  
[009] Extension Number Assignment .............................................. 4-10  
[010] LCD Time Display Selection................................................... 4-11  
[011] System Speed Dialling Name Setting...................................... 4-12  
[012] Alternative Feature Numbering Plan ....................................... 4-13  
[100] Hunting Group Set ................................................................... 4-14  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
[101] Hunting Type............................................................................ 4-14  
[102] Voice Mail Port for KX-TVP100............................................. 4-15  
[103] DTMF Integration for KX-TVP100......................................... 4-16  
[104] Hold Mode Selection ............................................................... 4-17  
[105] Conference Tone ...................................................................... 4-17  
[106] External Paging Access Tone................................................... 4-18  
[107] DTMF Receiver Check ............................................................ 4-18  
[108] Recall Mode for a Locked Extension ...................................... 4-18  
[109] CO Indicator Assignment......................................................... 4-19  
[110] Recall Key Mode...................................................................... 4-19  
[111] Hold Music Selection............................................................... 4-20  
[112] DSS Console Indication Mode ................................................ 4-20  
[115] Extension Ringing Pattern Selection ....................................... 4-21  
[116] Conference Pattern Selection................................................... 4-21  
[117] Call Pickup Tone...................................................................... 4-22  
[118] Pulse Restriction ...................................................................... 4-22  
[119] Redialling after Pulse to Tone Conversion .............................. 4-22  
[120] Bell Frequency ......................................................................... 4-23  
[121] Automatic Exchange Line Access Number Selection ............. 4-23  
[122] Automatic Rotation for Exchange Line Access....................... 4-23  
[123] Break Ratio .............................................................................. 4-24  
[124] SLT Ringing Mode Selection................................................... 4-24  
[125] Call Barring Check for  
and #.............................................. 4-24  
[126] DSS Off-Hook Mode ............................................................... 4-25  
[127] Pickup Group Set ..................................................................... 4-25  
[200] Hold Recall Time ..................................................................... 4-26  
[201] Transfer Recall Time................................................................ 4-26  
[202] Call Forwarding Start Time ..................................................... 4-27  
[203] Pickup Dial Delay Time........................................................... 4-27  
[204] Call Duration Count Start Time .............................................. 4-28  
[206] Dialling Start Time................................................................... 4-28  
[207] Recall Timing Range Selection................................................ 4-29  
[208] Interdigit Time.......................................................................... 4-29  
[210] DTMF Time ............................................................................. 4-30  
[211] No Dial Disconnection............................................................. 4-30  
[212] Exchange Line Duration Time Limit....................................... 4-31  
[213] Bell Off Detection.................................................................... 4-31  
[300] Carrier Excepted Code Assignment......................................... 4-32  
[301] Call Barring – System Speed Dialling Boundary Class.......... 4-32  
[302]-[305] Call Barring – Classes 2 through 5 Denied Codes........ 4-33  
[306] Call Barring – Exception Codes .............................................. 4-34  
[309] Emergency Dial Number Set ................................................... 4-34  
[310] Account Codes ......................................................................... 4-35  
[311] Automatic Pause Insertion Codes............................................ 4-35  
[312] Call Barring – Extension Lock Boundary Class ..................... 4-36  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
[350] ARS Selection.......................................................................... 4-37  
[351]-[354] Routes 1 through 4 Selection Codes (Leading Digits).. 4-37  
[355]-[358] Routes 1 through 4 Exception Codes ........................... 4-38  
[359] 1st Carrier Selection Code (BT Line Access Code)................ 4-38  
[360] ARS Modification – Removed Digits...................................... 4-39  
[361] ARS Modification – Added Number ....................................... 4-39  
[362] ARS Dial Tone Pattern Selection............................................. 4-40  
[363] ARS Interdigit Time................................................................. 4-40  
[364] ARS Trunk Group.................................................................... 4-41  
[381]-[384] Routes 1 through 4 Authorisation Codes....................... 4-42  
[385]-[388] Routes 1 through 4 Itemised Bill................................... 4-43  
[389] Itemised Bill Code Assignment ............................................... 4-43  
[400] Exchange Line Connection Assignment.................................. 4-44  
[401] Dial Mode ................................................................................ 4-44  
[402] Pulse Speed Selection .............................................................. 4-45  
[403] Host PBX Access Codes.......................................................... 4-45  
[404] Trunk Group Assignment......................................................... 4-46  
[405]-[407] Flexible Outward Dialling Assignment  
—Day/Night/Lunch ....................................................... 4-47  
[408]-[410] Flexible Ringing Assignment —Day/Night/Lunch ....... 4-48  
[411]-[413] Delayed Ringing Assignment —Day/Night/Lunch....... 4-49  
[414]-[416] Exchange Line Mode —Day/Night/Lunch.................... 4-50  
[417] Pause Time ............................................................................... 4-51  
[418] Recall Time .............................................................................. 4-52  
[419] Automatic Designated Exchange Line Access ........................ 4-52  
[420] Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal......................................... 4-53  
[421] CPC Detection for Outgoing Calls .......................................... 4-54  
[422] Disconnect Time ...................................................................... 4-54  
[423] Exchange Line Ringing Pattern Selection ............................... 4-55  
[424] Reverse (Polarity) Circuit Assignment .................................... 4-56  
[500] DISA Incoming Dialling Mode Selection ............................... 4-57  
[501] DISA Built-in Auto Attendant ................................................ 4-58  
[502] OGM Mode Selection.............................................................. 4-59  
[503] FAX Connection....................................................................... 4-60  
[504] DISA Delayed Answer Time ................................................... 4-60  
[505] DISA Waiting Time after OGM............................................... 4-60  
[506] DISA Busy Mode..................................................................... 4-61  
[507] DISA Intercept Mode............................................................... 4-61  
[508] DISA Ringing Time before Intercept ...................................... 4-62  
[509] DISA Ringing Time after Intercept ......................................... 4-62  
[510] DISA No Dial Mode ............................................................... 4-63  
[513] Cyclic Tone Detection.............................................................. 4-63  
[514] FAX Tone Detection ................................................................ 4-64  
[515] Intercept Time for Internal DISA ............................................ 4-64  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
[516] DISA Incoming Assignment.................................................... 4-65  
[517] DISA AA Wait Time................................................................ 4-65  
[519] DISA OGM Mute Time ........................................................... 4-66  
[520] UCD Group.............................................................................. 4-66  
[521] UCD Busy Waiting Time ......................................................... 4-66  
[522] UCD OGM Message Interval Time......................................... 4-67  
[523] UCD Busy Mode...................................................................... 4-67  
[524] UCD Intercept Mode................................................................ 4-68  
[525] UCD Ringing Time before Intercept ....................................... 4-68  
[526] UCD Ringing Time after Intercept .......................................... 4-68  
[600] Extension Group Assignment .................................................. 4-69  
[601]-[603] Call Barring – Class of Service Assignment  
—Day/Night/Lunch ....................................................... 4-69  
[604] Extension Name Setting........................................................... 4-70  
[605] Account Code Entry Mode ...................................................... 4-71  
[606] Call Transfer to an Exchange Line .......................................... 4-72  
[607] Call Forwarding to an Exchange Line..................................... 4-72  
[608] Executive Busy Override ......................................................... 4-73  
[609] Do Not Disturb Override ......................................................... 4-73  
[610] Parallelled Telephone Connection............................................ 4-74  
[611] TAM (Telephone Answering Machine) Extension .................. 4-74  
[612] Room Monitor Assignment...................................................... 4-75  
[613] Exchange Line Duration Time Limit Selection....................... 4-75  
[614] Internal Pulse Detection........................................................... 4-76  
[615] LCD Language Assignment..................................................... 4-77  
[700]-[702] Doorphone Ringing Assignment —Day/Night/Lunch .. 4-78  
[703]-[705] Door Opener Assignment —Day/Night/Lunch ............. 4-79  
[706] Doorphone Ringing / Tone Pattern Selection .......................... 4-80  
[707] Doorphone Access Tone Selection........................................... 4-80  
[708] Doorphone Ringing Time ........................................................ 4-81  
[709] Door Opener Time ................................................................... 4-81  
[800] SMDR RS-232C Communication Parameters......................... 4-82  
[801] SMDR Parameter ..................................................................... 4-83  
[802] Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for Printing....................... 4-83  
[803] Secret Speed Dialling / One-Touch Dialling Printing ............. 4-84  
[804] System Data Dump .................................................................. 4-84  
[805] SMDR Account Code Selection .............................................. 4-85  
[806] SMDR Language Assignment.................................................. 4-86  
[998] ROM Version............................................................................ 4-86  
[999] System Data Clear.................................................................... 4-87  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Section 5 Appendix  
5.1 Default Values ........................................................................................ 5-2  
5.2 Specifications ......................................................................................... 5-7  
Section 6 Troubleshooting  
6.1 While Installing ..................................................................................... 6-2  
6.2 While Connecting.................................................................................. 6-3  
6.3 While Operating.................................................................................... 6-4  
Section 7 Programming Tables  
Template  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 1  
Basic System Construction  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Basic System Construction  
The KX-TA624 has a basic capacity of 8 extensions and 3 exchange lines. It is capable of  
supporting Panasonic analogue proprietary telephones, and single line devices such as single  
line telephones, facsimiles and data terminals.  
To expand its capabilities, the system can be equipped with optional components or  
customer-supplied peripherals such as an external speaker, external music source (e.g. a radio)  
and door opener.  
System Connection Diagram  
6 Exchange Lines  
to exchange lines 1 – 3 (initial)  
to exchange lines 4 – 6 (additional)  
(Lightning Protectors)  
External Music Source  
Amplifier  
Speaker  
Printer  
or  
Computer  
Extension ports 01 – 08 (initial)  
Extension ports 09 – 24 (additional)  
24 Extensions  
(two pair)  
(one pair)  
(one pair)  
(two pair)  
Single Line Telephone  
KX-T7020  
(two pair)  
KX-T7130  
Data Terminal  
KX-T7040  
(two pair)  
Door Openers  
(one pair)  
Panasonic  
Cordless Phone  
(one pair)  
KX-T7050  
Panasonic  
Panasonic  
Panasonic  
• We recommend connecting a display  
proprietary telephone at extension port 01.  
• Parallel connection of telephones is  
Telephone Answering Machine  
with Facsimile  
!
(one pair)  
possible. ( 2.11, Parallelled Telephone  
☞
Connection)  
• A proprietary telephone cannot be  
connected to extension ports 17 through 24.  
Only a single line telephone (SLT) can be  
connected.  
Doorphones  
KX-T30865  
Voice Processing System  
1-2  
Basic System Construction  
: needs optional card.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 2  
Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.1  
Before Installation  
Please read the following notes concerning installation and connection before installing the  
system and terminal equipment.  
Safety Installation Instructions  
When installing telephone wiring, basic safety precautions should always be followed to  
reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:  
1. Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.  
2. Never install telephone ports in wet locations unless the port is specifically designed for  
wet locations.  
3. Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been  
disconnected at the network interface.  
4. Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.  
Installation Precautions  
This system is designed for wall mounting only. Avoid installing in the following places.  
(Doing so may result in malfunction, noise, or discolouration.)  
1. In direct sunlight and hot, cold, or humid places. (Temperature range: 0 °C – 40 °C)  
2. Sulphuric gases produced in areas where there are thermal springs, etc. may damage the  
equipment or contacts.  
3. Places in which shocks or vibrations are frequent or strong.  
4. Dusty places, or places where water or oil may come into contact with the system.  
5. Near high-frequency generating devices such as sewing machines or electric welders.  
6. On or near computers, telexes, or other office equipment, as well as microwave ovens or  
air conditioners. (It is preferable not to install the system in the same room with the above  
equipment.)  
7. Install at least 1.8 m away from radios and televisions. (Both the system and Panasonic  
proprietary telephones)  
8. Do not obstruct area around the system (for reasons of maintenance and inspection — be  
especially careful to allow space for cooling above and at the sides of the system).  
Wiring Precautions  
Be sure to follow these instructions when wiring the unit:  
1. Do not wire the telephone cable in parallel with an AC power source, computer, telex, etc.  
If the cables are run near those wires, shield the cables with metal tubing or use shielded  
cables and ground the shields.  
2. If cables are run on the floor, use protectors to prevent the wires from being stepped on.  
Avoid wiring under carpets.  
3. Avoid using the same power supply outlet for computers, telexes, and other office  
equipment. Otherwise, the system operation may be interrupted by the induction noise  
from such equipment.  
2-2  
Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.1  
Before Installation  
4. Please use one pair telephone wire for extension connection of (telephone) equipment  
such as single line telephones, data terminals, answering machines, computers, voice  
processing systems, etc., except Panasonic proprietary telephones (e.g. KX-T7130).  
5. Unplug the system during wiring. After all of the wiring is completed, plug in the  
system.  
6. Mis-wiring may cause the system to operate improperly. Refer to Section 6.1 “While  
Installing” and Section 6.2 “While Connecting”.  
7. If an extension does not operate properly, disconnect the telephone from the extension  
line and then connect again, or turn off the Power Switch of the system and then on  
again.  
8. The system is equipped with a 3-wire grounding type plug. This is a safety feature. If  
you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to replace your  
obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding-type plug.  
9. Exchange lines should be installed with lightning protectors. For details, refer to Section  
2.7 “Exchange Line Connection”, Installing Lightning Protectors.  
Warning:  
Static sensitive devices  
are used. To protect  
POWER  
printed circuit boards  
from static electricity, do  
not touch connectors  
indicated to the left. To  
discharge body static,  
touch ground or wear a  
grounding strap.  
Side View  
Warning: Static sensitive connectors  
Installation  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.2  
Unpacking  
Unpack the box and check the items below.  
Main Unit  
Music Source Connector  
Order No. PQJP1E1Z  
1
1
1
1
1
AC Cord  
Order No. PSWAT206E  
Installation Manual  
Order No. PSQX1708Y  
Telephone Line Cords  
(2-conductor wiring)  
Order No. PSJA1066Z  
Operating Instructions  
Order No. PSQX1709Y  
3
8
Telephone Line Cords  
(4-conductor wiring)  
Order No. PQJA151Z  
Operating Instructions for  
the Caller ID Card  
Order No. PSQX1744Y  
1
Screws (Wall Mounting)  
Order No. PQHE5004Z  
SLT User Guide  
Order No. PSQX1753Z  
3
3
1
2
1
1
Washers (Wall Mounting)  
Order No. XWG35FY  
System Clear Leaflet  
Order No. PSQW1412Y  
Pager Connector  
Order No. PQJP1E1Z  
Feature Number Leaflet  
Order No. PSQW1472Y  
Optional Cards (For your reference)  
KX-TA62460  
KX-TA62474  
KX-TA62477  
Screws  
Order No. XYN3+F12FN  
Screws  
Order No. XYN3+F8  
Extension Bolts  
Order No. PSHE1051Z  
1
2
2
2
2
1
Terminal Boxes  
Order No. PQJS1T30Z  
Extension Connectors  
Order No. PSJP36A67Z  
Extension Connectors  
Order No. PSJP36A67Z  
2
Telephone Line Cords  
(4-conductor wiring)  
Order No. PQJA48W  
Spacer  
Order No. PSHR1172Z  
2
2.3  
Names and Locations  
Strap (for cables)  
Paging Port  
Extension Ports  
Exchange Line Ports  
External Music Port  
POWER  
Power Switch  
Serial Interface  
(RS-232C)  
Protective Earth Terminal  
AC Inlet  
Side View  
Power Indicator  
2-4  
Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.4  
Wall Mounting  
This set is designed for wall mounting only. The wall where the main unit is to be mounted  
must be able to support the weight of the main unit. If screws other than the ones supplied  
are used, use screws with the same diameter as the ones enclosed.  
Mounting on a Wooden Wall  
1. Place the template (on the last page) on the wall to mark the screw positions.  
Template  
2. Install the screws (included) into the wall.  
Wooden  
Wall  
Drive the screw  
to this position  
3. Hook the main unit on the screw heads.  
Installation  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.5  
Frame Ground Connection  
IMPORTANT!!!  
Connect the frame of the main unit to  
the ground.  
1. Loosen the screw.  
2. Insert the grounding wire (user-  
supplied).  
To the ground  
Screw  
3. Tighten the screw.  
4. Connect the grounding wire to the ground.  
2.6  
Opening the Top Front Cover  
1. Loosen the screw.  
2. Remove the top front cover.  
Top front cover  
Screw  
• The screw cannot be removed from the cover.  
!
2-6  
Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.7  
Exchange Line Connection  
Connection  
1. Insert the modular plugs of the telephone line cords (2-conductor wiring) into the ports  
(CO 1 through 3) on the system.  
2. Connect the line cords to the terminal board or the ports from the Local Exchange.  
View of TEL Port (Exchange Line)  
A: Tip  
B: Ring  
A B  
To Terminal Board or Ports  
from the Local Exchange  
POWER  
• Exchange Line ports are at TNV.  
!
Installing Lightning Protectors  
A lightning protector is a device to be installed on an exchange line to prevent a dangerous  
surge from entering the building and damaging the equipment.  
A dangerous surge can occur if a telephone line comes in contact with a power line. Problems  
due to lightning surges have been steadily increasing with the development of electronic  
equipment.  
In many countries, there are regulations requiring the installation of a lightning protector. A  
lightning strike to a telephone cable which is 10 m above ground can be as high as 200 000 V.  
This system should be installed with lightning protectors. In addition, grounding (connection  
to earth ground) is very important to protect the system (☞ 2.5, Frame Ground Connection).  
Installation  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.7  
Exchange Line Connection  
Installation  
CO  
CO  
CO  
Lightning  
Protectors  
System  
Terminal  
Board  
EXTN.  
Protective  
Earth  
Terminal  
EXTN.  
TEL  
EXTN.  
TEL  
Frame Ground  
CO:  
Exchange line  
Ground  
EXTN.: Extension line  
TEL: Telephone  
Outside Installation  
If you install an extension outside of the main building, the following precautions are  
recommended:  
(1) Install the extension wire underground.  
(2) Use a conduit to protect the wire.  
(Main Building)  
Protectors  
CO  
(Another Building)  
CO  
SLT  
PT  
CO  
Main  
Distribution  
Frame  
EXTN  
Main  
Unit  
Lightning  
Protector  
EXTN  
EXTN  
EXTN  
TEL  
TEL  
Earth  
Note • The lightning protector for an extension is different from that for CO.  
2-8  
Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.7  
Exchange Line Connection  
Installation of an Earth Rod  
Lightning  
Protectors  
CO  
Grounding Wire  
System  
(Underground)  
Rod  
1) Installation location of the earth rod . . . . . . Near the protector  
2) Check obstructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . None  
3) Composition of the earth rod . . . . . . . . . . . Metal  
4) Depth of the earth rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . More than 50 cm  
5) Size of the grounding wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thickness more than ø1.6 mm  
Note • The above example is only a recommendation.  
• The length of the earth rod and required depth depend on the composition of the soil.  
Installation  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.8  
Extension Connection  
Extension ports 01 through 08 can be used for all kinds of telephones.  
Telephone Wiring  
The maximum length of the extension line cord (twisted cable) which connects the system  
and the extension is as follows.  
ø 0.5 mm (26 AWG); Under 140 m  
ø 0.6 mm (24 AWG); Under 229 m  
ø 0.8 mm (22 AWG); Under 360 m  
(Extension Loop Limit: 40 Ω)  
Proprietary Telephone  
Single Line Telephone  
ø 0.5 mm (26 AWG); Under 698 m  
ø 0.6 mm (24 AWG); Under 1128 m  
ø 0.8 mm (22 AWG); Under 1798 m  
(Extension Loop Limit: 600 Ω including set)  
ø 0.5 mm (26 AWG); Under 140 m  
ø 0.6 mm (24 AWG); Under 229 m  
ø 0.8 mm (22 AWG); Under 360 m  
(Extension Loop Limit: 40 Ω)  
DSS Console  
(KX-T7040)  
2 or 4-conductor wiring is required for each extension as listed below. There are 4 pins  
possible for connection: “T” (Tip), “R” (Ring), “L” (Low) and “H” (High).  
Telephone  
Wiring  
1 pair wire (A,B)  
Single line telephones  
Proprietary telephone  
(e.g., KX-T7130)  
2 pair wire (L, H, A, B)  
• If a telephone or answering machine with an A-A1 relay is connected to the system, set  
the A-A1 relay switch on the telephone or answering machine to the OFF position.  
• Extension ports are at TNV.  
!
2-10  
Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.8  
Extension Connection  
Connection  
Insert the modular plugs of the telephone line cords (2 or 4-conductor wiring) into the ports  
(JACK 01 through 08) on the system.  
View of TEL Port (Extension)  
H: High  
A: Tip  
B: Ring  
L: Low  
HAB L  
To extensions  
(JACK 01–08)  
POWER  
• System extensions must be located within the same building as the KX-TA624.  
!
Installation  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.9  
External Pager (Paging Equipment) Connection  
One external pager (user-supplied) can be connected to the system as illustrated below.  
Use an EIAJ RC-6701 A plug (2-conductor, ø 3.5 mm in diameter).  
• Output impedance: 600 Ω  
Maximum length of the cable  
ø 0.8 mm – ø 1.3 mm: Under 10 m  
Paging Port  
POWER  
PAGING  
Speaker  
Amplifier  
Paging Equipment  
• To adjust the sound level of the pager, use the volume control on the amplifier.  
• Paging port is at SELV.  
!
☞
• Required System Programming  
Section 4.2, System Programming  
[106] External Paging Access Tone  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Paging  
2-12  
Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.10  
External Music Connection  
One music source, such as a radio (user-supplied), can be connected to the system as  
illustrated below.  
Insert the plug to the earphone/headphone port on the external music source.  
Use an EIAJ RC-6701 A plug (2-conductor, ø 3.5 mm in diameter).  
• Input impedance: 8 Ω  
Maximum length of the cable  
ø 0.8 mm – ø 1.3 mm: Under 10 m  
External Music Port  
EXT.  
POWER  
MUSIC  
External Music source  
• System programming for the music sources used for Music on Hold and Background  
Music (BGM) is required.  
• To adjust the sound level of the Music on Hold, use the volume control on the external  
music source.  
!
• External Music port is at SELV.  
• Required System Programming  
Section 4.2, System Programming  
[111] Hold Music Selection  
☞
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Music on Hold / Background Music (BGM)  
Installation  
2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.11  
Parallelled Telephone Connection  
Any single line telephone can be connected in parallel with a proprietary telephone as  
follows.  
Using a Modular T-Adaptor  
2-conductor wiring cord  
Connect pins “A” and “B”.  
4-conductor wiring cord  
For a proprietary telephone:  
Connect pins “A”, “B”, “H” and “L”.  
Proprietary Telephone  
Single Line Telephone  
• Required System Programming  
Section 4.2, System Programming  
☞
[610] Parallelled Telephone Connection  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Parallelled Telephone Connection  
2-14  
Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.12  
Polarity Sensitive Telephone Connection  
If your telephone is polarity sensitive, follow the procedure below:  
1. Complete all the required extension wiring.  
2. Confirm that dialling can be done from all the  
extensions using a touch-tone telephone.  
If dialling fails, the polarity between the extension  
and the system must be reversed.  
3. Reverse as shown.  
Extension  
4. Unplug the system.  
Exchange Line  
Reverse here  
1
4
2
5
8
3
6
7
9
0
5. Connect all exchange lines.  
6. Confirm that dialling can be done on the following  
extension using a touch-tone telephone.  
Extension (A, B) of port 01: Exchange line 1  
If dialling fails, the polarity between the system and  
the exchange line must be reversed.  
7. Reverse as shown.  
8. Every time an extension telephone is replaced,  
Extension  
repeat the procedure above.  
Exchange Line  
1
4
2
5
8
3
6
7
9
0
Reverse here  
Installation  
2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.13  
Printer and PC Connection  
A user-supplied printer or personal computer (PC) can be connected to the system. These  
are used to print out or refer to the SMDR call records and system programming data.  
Connect the printer cable or the PC cable to the Serial Interface (RS-232C) connector. The  
cable must be shielded and the maximum length is 2 m.  
Serial Interface  
(RS-232C) (D-SUB, 9-pin)  
Printer  
or  
Computer  
Arrange the cables so that the printer will be connected to the system as shown in the  
appropriate chart on the following page.  
The pin configuration of the Serial Interface (RS-232C) Connector is as follows.  
Pin  
No.  
2
Signal Name  
Circuit Type  
EIA CCITT  
RXD  
Received Data  
BB  
104  
3
4
TXD  
DTR  
Transmitted Data  
Data Terminal Ready  
BA  
CD  
103  
108.2  
5
6
SG  
DSR  
Signal Ground  
Data Set Ready  
AB  
CC  
102  
107  
7
8
RTS  
CTS  
Request To Send  
Clear To Send  
CA  
CB  
105  
106  
2-16  
Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.13  
Printer and PC Connection  
Connection Chart for a Printer / Personal Computer with the System  
If you connect a printer or a PC with a 9-pin cable, follow the chart below.  
System  
9-pin Cable Printer/PC  
Circuit  
type  
Circuit  
type  
Signal  
name  
Pin  
no.  
Pin  
no.  
Signal  
name  
(EIA)  
(EIA)  
BB  
RXD  
2
2
RXD  
BB  
BA  
CD  
TXD  
DTR  
3
4
3
4
TXD  
DTR  
BA  
CD  
AB  
CC  
SG  
5
6
5
6
SG  
AB  
CC  
DSR  
DSR  
7
8
CA  
CB  
CA  
CB  
RTS  
CTS  
7
8
RTS  
CTS  
If you connect a printer or a PC with a 25-pin cable, follow the chart below.  
System  
25-pin Cable Printer/PC  
Circuit  
Circuit  
type  
Signal  
name  
Pin  
no.  
Pin  
no.  
Signal  
name  
type  
(EIA)  
AA  
(EIA)  
1
3
FG  
BB  
RXD  
2
RXD  
BB  
BA  
CD  
TXD  
DTR  
3
4
2
TXD  
BA  
AB  
CC  
SG  
5
6
20  
7
DTR  
SG  
CD  
AB  
CB  
CC  
CF  
DSR  
5
6
8
CTS  
DSR  
DCD  
7
8
CA  
CB  
RTS  
CTS  
Installation  
2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.13  
Printer and PC Connection  
Serial Interface (RS-232C) Signals  
Frame Ground: FG  
Connects the unit frame and the earth ground conductor of the AC power cord.  
Transmitted Data: SD (TXD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (output)  
Conveys signals from the unit to the printer. A “Mark” condition is held unless data or  
BREAK signals are being transmitted.  
Received Data: RD (RXD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (input)  
Conveys signals from the printer.  
Request to Send: RS (RTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (output)  
This lead remains ON whenever DR (DSR) is ON.  
Clear To Send: CS (CTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (input)  
When the CS (CTS) circuit is ON, it indicates that the printer is ready to receive data from  
the unit. The unit does not attempt to transfer data or receive data when the CS (CTS) circuit  
is OFF.  
Data Set Ready: DR (DSR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (input)  
When the DR (DSR) circuit is ON, it indicates the printer is ready. The DR (DSR) circuit  
being ON does not indicate that communication has been established with the printer.  
Signal Ground: SG  
Connects the DC ground of the unit for all interface signals.  
Data Terminal Ready: ER (DTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (output)  
This signal line is turned ON by the unit to indicate that it is ON  
LINE. The ER (DTR) circuit being ON does not indicate that communication has been  
established with the printer. It is switched OFF when the unit is OFF LINE.  
Data Carrier Detect: CD (DCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (input)  
When ON, it indicates the data terminal (DTE) that the carrier signal is being received.  
• Required System Programming  
Section 4.2, System Programming  
☞
[800] SMDR RS-232C Communication Parameters  
[801] SMDR Parameter  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)  
2-18  
Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.14  
Location of Optional Cards  
The location of the optional cards is shown below.  
Precaution  
To protect the printed circuit boards (P-boards) from static electricity, do not  
touch parts on the P-boards in the main unit and on the optional cards. If  
accessing the parts is required, wear a grounding strap.  
3 CO Line and 8 EXT  
Expansion Card  
(KX-TA62477) or  
8 Extension Expansion  
Card (KX-TA62470)  
Doorphone/Door Opener Card  
(KX-TA62460) Connector  
Connector  
The front covers are open.  
OGM/FAX Detection Card (KX-TA62491)  
Connector  
Caller ID Card (KX-TA62493)  
Connector  
NOTE:  
Power off the system, and unplug the AC cord before installing an  
optional card.  
2.15  
OGM/FAX Detection Card Installation  
An optional OGM/FAX Detection Card (KX-TA62491) can be installed to the system.  
The OGM/FAX Detection Card supports the following.  
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) with OGM:  
One of the system features. An outgoing message greets the external caller and gives  
information so that the caller can access an extension(s) directly.  
Facsimile detection:  
When the system receives a facsimile transmission signal by DISA, it automatically  
connects the specified facsimile extension.  
1. Remove the 2 screws.  
Screws  
Installation  
2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.15  
OGM/FAX Detection Card Installation  
2. Open the bottom front cover.  
Bottom front cover  
3. Attach the OGM/FAX Detection card.  
OGM/FAX Detection Card  
(KX-TA62491)  
Note  
Please do not damage this part.  
4. Insert the flat cables to the card connector.  
Flat cables  
5. Close the cover.  
• Required System Programming  
☞
See ‘Required System Programming’ in Section 3, Features “Direct Inward System  
Access (DISA)”  
• Feature References  
Section 3, Features  
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)  
Outgoing Message (OGM)  
2-20  
Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.16  
Doorphone and Door Opener Connection  
Four doorphones (KX-T30865) and 4 door openers (user-supplied) can be installed.  
Maximum cable length  
The maximum length of the doorphone and door opener line cord which connects the system  
is as follows.  
ø 0.6 mm (24 AWG); Under 113 m  
ø 0.8 mm (22 AWG); Under 180 m  
(Extension Loop Limit: 20 Ω)  
Panasonic  
Doorphone  
(KX-T30865)  
Door Opener  
ø 0.8 mm (22 AWG); Under 180 m  
Installing the Doorphone  
1. Loosen the screw to open the doorphone unit.  
Panasonic  
Screw  
2. Attach the base cover to a wall using 2 screws.  
Screws  
Note Two kinds of screws are included. Please choose the  
appropriate one depending on your type of wall.  
Type 1: When a doorphone plate has  
been fixed to the wall.  
Type 2: When you wish to install the  
doorphone directly to the wall.  
Installation  
2-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.16  
Doorphone and Door Opener Connection  
3. Connect the wires to the screws located in the front cover.  
To the terminal box  
4. Put the doorphone together and re-install the screw.  
Doorphone/Door Opener Installation  
Attach the optional Doorphone/Door Opener Card to the main unit, connect the cord to the  
Doorphone/Door Opener Card Connector and secure the screw.  
Doorphone Connectors  
Door Opener Terminal  
Screw  
Doorphone/Door Opener Card  
(KX-TA62460)  
Doorphone/Door Opener Card  
Card Connector  
2-22  
Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.16  
Doorphone and Door Opener Connection  
Wiring of the Doorphone  
1. Connect the Doorphone/Door Opener Card to the terminal boxes using 4-conductor  
modular connectors.  
2. Connect the wires of doorphones 1 and 3 to the red and green screws on the terminal box.  
3. Connect the wires of doorphones 2 and 4 to the yellow and black screws on the terminal  
box.  
View of Doorphone Connector Port  
Doorphone 2  
Doorphone 1  
Doorphone 4  
Doorphone 3  
4-conductor wiring  
is required.  
Black  
Green  
Yellow  
Red  
Panasonic  
Panasonic  
Doorphone 1  
(KX-T30865)  
Doorphone 2  
(KX-T30865)  
4-conductor wiring  
is required.  
Black  
Green  
Yellow  
Red  
Panasonic  
Panasonic  
Doorphone 3  
(KX-T30865)  
Doorphone 4  
(KX-T30865)  
Installation  
2-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.16  
Doorphone and Door Opener Connection  
Connecting Door Openers  
1. While pressing the button below a hole with a screw driver, insert the wire from the door  
opener into the hole.  
Door opener 1  
Door opener 2  
Door opener 3  
Door opener 4  
To the door openers  
2. Wrap the strap around all of the cords. (☞ 2.20, Securing the Cords)  
• We recommend using the wire (ø 0.4 mm – ø 1.2 mm) or the equivalent for wiring.  
• The wire should be under 3.0 mm in diameter including the coating.  
• Door Opener ports are at SELV.  
!
D = 0.4 mm – 1.2 mm  
D = Under 3.0 mm  
• Required System Programming  
☞
Section 4 System Programming  
[700]–[702] Doorphone Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch  
[703]–[705] Door Opener Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch  
• Feature References  
Section 3, Features  
Door Opener, Doorphone Call  
2-24  
Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.17  
Installing a 3-CO Line & 8 Ext Expansion Card (KX-TA62477)  
and 8 SLT Extn. Expansion Card (KX-TA62474)  
3-CO Line and 8 Ext Expansion Card Installation (KX-TA62477)  
To add 3 exchange lines (exchange lines 4 through 6) and 8 extensions (extension ports  
09 through 16), use an optional 3-CO Line and 8 Ext Expansion Card (KX-TA62477).  
8 SLT Extension Expansion Card Installation (KX-TA62474)  
To add 8 extensions (extension ports 17 through 24), use an optional 8 SLT Extension  
Expansion Card (KX-TA62474).  
This card can be installed directly to the system or to the KX-TA62477.  
• Only a single line telephone (SLT) can be connected to extension ports 17 through 24.  
!
Installing the KX-TA62477  
1. Loosen the screws and open the top and bottom front covers.  
2. Remove the lower front panel with a suitable tool as shown below. Cut the 6 areas  
marked with a circle.  
Lower front panel  
Installation  
2-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.17  
Installing a 3-CO Line & 8 Ext Expansion Card (KX-TA62477)  
and 8 SLT Extn. Expansion Card (KX-TA62474)  
3. After cutting the areas, be sure to cut off any excess plastic in order to make the surface  
smooth.  
4. First, insert the plastic spacer into the hole on the KX-TA62477. Attach the 2 extension  
connectors to the system, install the KX-TA62477 and secure the 2 extension spacers.  
Extension Spacers  
3 CO Line and 8 EXT Expansion Card  
(KX-TA62477)  
Caller ID Card Connector  
Spacer  
Extension Connectors  
2-26  
Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.17  
Installing a 3-CO Line & 8 Ext Expansion Card (KX-TA62477)  
and 8 SLT Extn. Expansion Card (KX-TA62474)  
5. Insert the modular plugs of the telephone line cords (2-conductor wiring) into the ports  
(CO 4 through 6) on the card. (☞ 2.7, Exchange Line Connection)  
6. Connect the line cords to the terminal board or the ports from the Local Exchange.  
7. Insert the modular plugs of the telephone line cords (2 or 4-conductor wiring) into the  
ports (JACK 09 through 16). (☞ 2.8, Extension Connection)  
8. Wrap the strap around all of the cords. (☞ 2.19, Securing the Cords)  
9. Close the covers and secure the screws.  
Installing the KX-TA62474  
1. Loosen the screws and open the front and bottom front covers.  
2. Remove the lower front panel in the same way as installing a KX-TA62477. If you  
install the KX-TA62474 to a KX-TA62477, remove the top front panel with pliers.  
Top front panel  
3. After cutting the areas, be sure to cut off any excess plastic in order to make the surface  
smooth. Please refer to installing the KX-TA62477.  
Installation  
2-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.17  
Installing a 3-CO Line & 8 Ext Expansion Card (KX-TA62477)  
and 8 SLT Extn. Expansion Card (KX-TA62474)  
4. Attach the 2 extension connectors to the system first, install the KX-TA62474 and secure  
the 2 screws.  
Screws  
8 SLT Extension Expansion Card  
(KX-TA62474)  
Extension Connectors  
5. Insert the modular plugs of the telephone line cords (2-conductor wiring) into the ports  
(JACK 17 through 24). (☞ 2.8, Extension Connection)  
6. Wrap the strap around all of the cords. (☞ 2.19, Securing the Cords)  
7. Close the covers and secure the screws.  
2-28  
Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.17  
Installing a 3-CO Line & 8 Ext Expansion Card (KX-TA62477)  
and 8 SLT Extn. Expansion Card (KX-TA62474)  
Installing the KX-TA62477 and KX-TA62474  
1. Install the KX-TA62477 first and then the KX-TA62474.  
Screws  
8 SLT Extension Expansion Card  
(KX-TA62474)  
Extension Spacers  
Extension Connectors  
3 CO Line and 8 EXT Expansion Card  
(KX-TA62477)  
Spacer  
Extension Connectors  
Installation  
2-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.18  
Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer  
Power failure transfer connects a specific single line telephone (SLT) to selected exchange  
lines in the event of system power failure, as follows.  
Exchange line 1 – extension (T, R) port 01  
Exchange line 4 – extension (T, R) port 09  
Connection of exchange lines 1 and 4, and the respective extensions require no auxiliary  
connection.  
• In the event of a power failure, system memory is protected by a factory-provided lithium  
battery. There is no memory loss except the Camp-on, Saved Number Redial, Last Number  
Redial, Call Park and Message Waiting memories.  
• The system automatically changes the current connection to the above connection when the  
power supply stops.  
!
• Proprietary telephones cannot be used during a power failure. Therefore, we recommend  
connecting SLTs in parallel with proprietary telephones connected to extension ports  
01 and 09.  
• Feature References  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Power Failure Transfer, Parallelled Telephone Connection  
2-30  
Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.19  
Securing the Cords  
1. Wrap the strap around all of the cords.  
• To remove the rivet, use a screw driver as shown below.  
!
Rivet  
2.20  
Closing the Front Cover  
1. Replace the covers and tighten the screws.  
2. Tie together all of the connected cords and attach them to the wall so that the cords  
cannot be pulled out of the system.  
Installation  
2-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.21  
Starting the System for the First Time  
1. Set the Power Switch to the “OFF” position.  
2. Plug the AC power cord into the system and an AC outlet.  
3. Turn the Power Switch on.  
(The power indicator will light.)  
4. Perform the following operation with a proprietary telephone connected to JACK 01.  
a) Set the MEMORY switch to “PROGRAM” on the back of the telephone.  
b) Press  
#.  
c) Enter 1234.  
d) Enter 999.  
e) Press the NEXT (SP-PHONE) button.  
f) Press the SELECT (AUTO ANSWER/MUTE) button until  
“All Para” is displayed.  
g) Press the STORE (AUTO DIAL/STORE) button.  
h) Press the END (HOLD) button.  
i) Set the MEMORY switch to “SET” on the back of the telephone.  
The system will be initialised with the default values. If the system does not work properly,  
please see 2.23, “System Data Clear”.  
CAUTION • The system will continue to be powered even if the Power Switch is turned  
“OFF”.  
• The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device. Ensure that the  
outlet is located/installed near the equipment and is easily accessible.  
To AC outlet  
2-32  
Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.22  
System Restart  
After starting the system, if the system does not operate properly, restart the system.  
Before restarting the system, try the system feature again to confirm whether there definitely  
is a problem or not.  
System Restart causes the following.  
• Camp-on is cleared.  
• Calls on Hold are terminated.  
• Calls on Exclusive Hold are terminated.  
• Calls in progress are terminated.  
• Call Park is cleared.  
• Message Waiting is cleared.  
• Last Number Redial is cleared.  
• Saved Number Redial is cleared.  
Other data is not cleared by System Restart.  
1. Turn the Power Switch “OFF” and then “ON”.  
• If the system still does not operate properly, please see 2.23, “System Data Clear”.  
!
Installation  
2-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.23  
System Data Clear  
When the system does not operate properly after restarting, you can clear the programming  
data stored in the system. The system will restart with the default settings.  
First, try system program [999] “System Data Clear” by following step 4 in 2.21, “Starting  
the System for the First Time”. If the system still does not operate properly, please follow  
the procedure below.  
1. Slide the System Clear Switch to the “CLEAR” position.  
2. Press the Reset Button.  
3. Return the System Clear Switch to the “NORMAL” position before the power indicator  
stops flashing.  
(The power indicator will flash for about 10 seconds.)  
Reset Button  
System Clear Switch  
CAUTION • Before touching the System Clear Switch and Reset Button, put on a  
grounding strap.  
• After pressing the Reset Button, return the System Clear Switch to the “NORMAL”  
position in step 3 before the power indicator stops flashing. Otherwise, the system will  
not clear.  
!
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
☞
System Data Default Set  
2-34  
Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 3  
Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
A
Absent Message Capability  
Allows an extension user to set a message which will be displayed at the calling extension  
to show the reason for the called extension’s absence. One of 6 messages can be  
programmed as desired, which are available for any telephone (single line telephone or  
proprietary telephone). Setting or cancelling a message can be done by individual extension  
users but only callers using a proprietary telephone with a LCD can see the message.  
• The 6 messages are shown below. “%” means a parameter to be entered when assigning  
a message at an extension.  
!
(1) Will Return Soon  
(2) Gone Home  
(3) At Ext %%% (extension number)  
(4) Back at %% : %% AM (or PM) (hour : minute)  
(5) Out Until %%/%% (day / month)  
(6) In a Meeting  
• An extension user can only select one message at a time. The selected message is  
displayed every time the user goes off-hook.  
• Operating Instructions Reference  
☞
1.6 Before Leaving Your Desk, “Showing Your Message on the Calling Party’s Display  
(Absent Message Capability)”  
3-2  
Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
A
Account Code Entry  
An account code is used to identify incoming and outgoing outside calls for accounting and  
billing purposes. The account code is appended to the SMDR call record. For incoming  
outside calls, an account code is optional. For outgoing outside calls, there are 4 account  
input modes programmable in program [605], Option, Forced, Verify–All and Verify–Toll.  
Option:  
A 4-digit code may be entered during a conversation or within 30 seconds  
after a conversation when a record is needed.  
Forced:  
A 4-digit code must be entered within 5 seconds after an exchange line is  
seized. The code can be any number.  
Verify–All: Enables to make an outside call if the code entered within 5 seconds after an  
extension user seizes an exchange line is the same as one of the account  
codes programmed in [310].  
Verify–Toll: Enables to override call barring temporarily by entering one of the account  
codes programmed in [310] within 5 seconds after an exchange line is  
seized. Calls with COS numbers 3 through 5 will be treated as calls with  
COS number 2. Calls with COS numbers 1 and 2 will not be affected.  
• Required System Programming  
☞
[310] Account Codes  
[601]-[603] Call Barring – Class of Service Assignment —Day/Night/Lunch  
[605] Account Code Entry Mode  
[805] SMDR Account Code Selection  
• Related Feature References  
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR),  
Call Barring Override by Account Codes  
• Operating Instructions Reference  
1.7 Useful Features, “Calling with Account Codes (Account Code Entry)”  
Alternate Calling – Ring/Voice  
This system offers a proprietary telephone user 2 types of intercom calling, Voice Call mode  
and Tone (ring) Call mode. “Voice Call” informs the called party of an incoming call with  
the calling party’s voice, while “Tone Call” uses a ring tone. A proprietary telephone user  
can select “Voice Call” or “Tone Call” in the Proprietary Telephone Settings. If the user  
selects “Voice Call”, the calling party can talk to the user immediately after the confirmation  
tone. The calling party can switch the pre-set mode at the called extension, from “Voice  
Call” to “Tone Call” or vice versa, by pressing “ ” after dialling the extension number.  
• A rotary telephone user cannot change the pre-set mode at the called extension.  
!
☞
• Operating Instructions References  
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising Your Telephone Functions”, Intercom  
Alert Assignment  
1.7 Useful Features, “Alternate Calling – Ring/Voice”  
Features  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
A
Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On)  
When the selected exchange line or dialled extension is busy, the system will automatically  
notify an extension user with a callback ringing when the line becomes available. When the  
user answers the callback ringing:  
For an extension:  
The called extension starts ringing without dialling.  
For an exchange line: The line is seized.  
• Operating Instructions Reference  
☞
1.3 Making Calls, “Making Your Telephone Ring Back Automatically When a Line  
Becomes Free (Automatic Callback Busy – Camp-On)”  
Automatic Exchange Line Access Number  
An Automatic Line Access number (0 or 9) can be programmed. When an extension user  
dials an Automatic Line Access number before a telephone number, an available exchange  
line from the assigned lines in program [419] is seized automatically. If “0” is selected in  
program [121], the operator call will be “9” automatically. If “9” is selected in program  
[121], the operator call will be “0” automatically.  
• Related Feature References  
☞
Operator Call, Outside Calling  
• Required System Programming  
[121] Automatic Exchange Line Access Number Selection  
[419] Automatic Designated Exchange Line Access  
3-4  
Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
A
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)  
The system automatically selects the least expensive route available at the time a long  
distance call is made on the exchange line enabled for ARS feature. It is not necessary to dial  
the access code of the least expensive carrier.  
1. Normal Use  
To make a call via the least expensive carrier, the dialled number is modified. The following  
are modification examples.  
Example 1 (Long distance call using Route 1):  
[350] “ARS Selection”: Enable  
[351] “Route 1 Selection Codes (Leading Digit)”: 0  
[355] “Route 1 Exception Codes”: 07  
[360] “ARS Modification – Removed Digits”: 0 (No deletion)  
[361] “ARS Modification – Added Number”: 131(Code of least expensive carrier for a  
long distance call)  
[381] “Route 1 Authorisation Code”: 0123456789  
[385] “Route 1 Itemised Bill”: Enable  
[389] “Itemised Bill Code Assignment”: 201  
<Dialled number>  
01633 877 467  
<Modified number>  
131 0123456789 201 01633 877 467  
Example 2 (International call using Route 2):  
[350] “ARS Selection”: Enable  
[352] “Route 2 Selection Codes (Leading Digit)”: 00  
[360] “ARS Modification – Removed Digits”: 0  
[361] “ARS Modification – Added Number”: 1620 (Code of least expensive carrier for  
an international call)  
[386] “Route 2 Itemised Bill”: Enable  
[389] “Itemised Bill Code Assignment”: 201  
<Dialled number>  
00 44 1344 853941  
<Modified number>  
1620 201 00 44 1344 853941  
Example 3 (Long distance call via the first carrier):  
[350] “ARS Selection”: Enable  
[359] “1st Carrier Selection Code”: 121  
<Dialled number>  
121 01633 877 467  
<Modified number>  
01633 877 467  
Features  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
A
2. Special Use  
If an extension user always uses the Automatic Line Access number (9 or 0) when making  
an outside call and wants to seize the specified trunk group as below automatically, refer to  
the following program assignment.  
<Example>  
• Trunk group which connects with the least expensive carrier for a long distance call  
(Long distance calls start with “0”. Carrier code = 131)  
• Trunk group which connects with the least expensive carrier for an international call  
(International calls start with “00”. Carrier code = 1620)  
• Trunk group connected to a mobile telephone  
(No modification of the dialled number is necessary.)  
To specify how to modify the dialled number, and specify a trunk group for each  
route  
Program  
Address  
[351]  
[354]  
[355]  
[358]  
07  
[360]  
[361]  
[364]  
Route  
No.  
Route 1  
0
0 digit  
0 digits  
0 digit  
131  
trunk group number 1  
trunk group number 1  
trunk group number 2  
Route 2  
Route 3  
00  
1620  
079  
To specify exchange lines in the trunk groups  
Program  
Address  
[419] Automatic  
Designated  
Exchange Line  
Access  
[404] Trunk Group  
[350]  
Assignment  
Exchange  
Line No.  
1
2
3
trunk group number 1  
trunk group number 1  
trunk group number 2  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
Disable  
First  
Carrier  
Local Call  
Second  
Carrier  
131 (Long Distance Call)  
Mobile  
Jack  
KX-TA624  
Third  
Carrier  
1620 (International Call)  
Exchange Line  
1
2
3
Group1  
Group2  
3-6  
Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
A
Example 5 [Long distance call using Route 1 (trunk group number 1)]:  
<Dialled number>  
9 01633 877 467  
<Modified number>  
131 01633 877 467  
Example 6 [International call using Route 2 (trunk group number 1)]:  
<Dialled number>  
<Modified number>  
9 00 44 1344 853941  
1620 201 00 44 1344 853941  
Example 7 [Mobile telephone call using Route 3 (trunk group number 2)]:  
<Dialled number>  
9 07979 123456  
<Modified number>  
07979 123456  
• System Programming is required to execute this feature.  
• If an extension user makes an outside call using the Automatic Line Access number (9 or 0)  
and the dialled number does not apply to any numbers assigned in programs [351]–[354],  
an exchange line which has selected “Enable” in program [419] “Automatic Designated  
Exchange Line Access” is automatically seized.  
• Required System Programming  
☞
[350] ARS Selection  
[351]-[354] Routes 1 through 4 Selection Codes (Leading Digits)  
[355]-[358] Routes 1 through 4 Exception Codes  
[359] 1st Carrier Selection Code (BT Line Access Code)  
[360] ARS Modification – Removed Digits  
[361] ARS Modification – Added Number  
[362] ARS Dial Tone Pattern Selection  
[363] ARS Interdigit Time  
[364] ARS Trunk Group  
[381]-[384] Routes 1 through 4 Authorisation Codes  
[385]-[388] Routes 1 through 4 Itemised Bill  
[389] Itemised Bill Code Assignment  
Features  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
A
Flow chart of possible cases and results for ARS calls  
Start  
A
*1  
Is (another) 1 digit dialled within  
the ARS Interdigit Time?  
No  
Yes  
*2  
Yes  
Each time a digit is dialled, the system checks the  
dialled number (other than Host PBX access codes,  
Is the dialled number a  
call barring denied code?  
Reorder tone  
Carrier excepted codes and 1st carrier access code).  
No  
*3  
Yes  
The dialled number is sent  
to the Local Exchange.  
Is the dialled number an  
emergency call number?  
No  
*4  
Yes  
Is the dialled number a  
call barring denied code?  
Reorder tone  
No  
Yes  
The dialled number (other than the 1st carrier  
access code) is sent to the Local Exchange.  
Does the dialled number include  
the 1st carrier access code?  
No  
*6  
*7  
*8  
*5  
Does the area code match a  
Route 1 selection code?  
Does the area code  
match a Route 1  
exception code?  
Removing from  
and adding to the  
dialled number.  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Route 1 is  
selected.  
No  
Yes  
*10  
*7  
*7  
*8  
Route 2 is  
selected.  
*9  
Does the area code match a  
Route 2 selection code?  
Does the area code  
match a Route 2  
exception code?  
Removing from  
and adding to the  
dialled number.  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
*12  
*8  
Route 3 is  
selected.  
*11  
Does the area code match a  
Route 3 selection code?  
Does the area code  
match a Route 3  
exception code?  
Removing from  
and adding to the  
dialled number.  
No  
Yes  
*14  
*7  
*8  
*13  
Does the area code match a  
Route 4 selection code?  
Does the area code  
match a Route 4  
exception code?  
Removing from  
and adding to the  
dialled number.  
Route 4 is  
selected.  
No  
Yes  
Are 7 digits (other than Host PBX  
access codes, Carrier excepted codes  
and 1st carrier access code) dialled?  
No  
Yes  
*15  
The dialled number is sent  
to the Local Exchange.  
Goes to  
A
3-8  
Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
A
*1: The ARS Interdigit timer is assigned in program [363] “ARS Interdigit Time”.  
*2: The codes are assigned in the following programs.  
Host PBX access codes: [403] “Host PBX Access Codes”  
Carrier excepted codes: [300] “Carrier Excepted Code Assignment”  
1st carrier access code: [359] “1st Carrier Selection Code”.  
*3: Emergency call numbers are assigned in program [309] “Emergency Dial Number Set”.  
*4: Call Barring denied codes are assigned in program [302]-[305] “Call Barring – Classes 2  
through 5 Denied Codes”.  
*5: Route 1 selection codes are assigned in program [351] “Route 1 Selection Codes (Leading Digits)”.  
*6: Route 1 exception codes are assigned in program [355] “Route 1 Exception Codes”.  
*7: Removing digits are assigned in program [360] “ARS Modification – Removed Digits” and  
added numbers are in [361] “ARS Modification – Added Number”  
*8: The trunk group(s) assigned in program [364] is (are) automatically seized when making a call  
using the Automatic Exchange Line Access number (0 or 9).  
*9: Route 2 selection codes are assigned in program [352] “Route 2 Selection Codes (Leading Digits)”.  
*10: Route 2 exception codes are assigned in program [356] “Route 2 Exception Codes”.  
*11: Route 3 selection codes are assigned in program [353] “Route 3 Selection Codes (Leading  
Digits)”.  
*12: Route 3 exception codes are assigned in program [357] “Route 3 Exception Codes”.  
*13: Route 4 selection codes are assigned in program [354] “Route 4 Selection Codes (Leading  
Digits)”.  
*14: Route 4 exception codes are assigned in program [358] “Route 4 Exception Codes”.  
*15: The system repeats checking until 7 digits are dialled.  
Features  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
B
Busy Extension Signalling  
When an extension user calls a busy extension, the busy extension will hear a Call Waiting  
tone to know that a call is waiting.  
• This feature is only available if the called extension has set the Call Waiting feature. If  
the Call Waiting feature is activated, the caller will hear a ringback tone. If not, the caller  
will hear a reorder tone.  
!
• Related Feature Reference  
☞
Call Waiting  
• Operating Instructions Reference  
1.3 Making Calls, “Sending a Call Waiting Tone to a Busy Extension (Busy Extension  
Signalling)”  
She is on the line.  
I will send a Call  
Waiting tone.  
CALL WAITING TONE  
I’ve got another call.  
Please hold.  
3-10  
Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
C
Call Barring  
Call Barring is a system programmable feature that can prohibit certain extension users from  
making unauthorised toll calls.  
Every extension is programmed to belong to one of 5 classes of service (COS). Each COS is  
programmed to have a call barring class for day mode, night mode and lunch mode.  
There are 5 call barring COS numbers available. Call barring COS number 1 is the highest  
class and the COS number 5 is the lowest. That is, COS number 1 allows all toll calls. COS  
numbers 2 through 5 are used to restrict calls by combining pre-programmed deny and  
exception codes shown in the table on the next page.  
Denied Codes  
An outgoing outside call made by an extension with a call barring COS number between 2  
and 5 is first checked against the assigned denied codes in program [302]-[305].  
If the first digits of the dialled number (not including the line access code) are not found in  
the class, the call can be made. Each class can store up to 20 denied codes, each consisting  
of 11 digits.  
Exception Codes  
These codes are used to override a programmed denied code. A call denied by the denied  
codes is checked against the selected exception codes assigned in program [306]. If a match  
is found, the call can be made.  
Up to 80 exception codes, each consisting of 11 digits, can be stored. The available number  
of codes depends on the COS number.  
• Emergency numbers, such as the police or fire station, should be stored in program  
[309] “Emergency Dial Number Set” so that they are exempt from call barring.  
• If a stored Host PBX access code in program [403] “Host PBX Access Codes” or a stored  
carrier code in program [300] “Carrier Excepted Code Assignment” is found in the  
dialled number, the subsequent telephone numbers will be checked for call barring.  
• The interdigit timer assigned in program [208] “Interdigit Time” applies until the call  
barring check is completed. When the timer expires, an outside outgoing call will be  
disconnected while dialling, if “Enable” was selected in program [211] “No Dial  
Disconnection”.  
!
• The call barring class for a locked extension can be assigned in program [312] “Call  
Barring – Extension Lock Boundary Class” so that even a locked extension can make a  
local call, etc.  
• It is programmable whether the “ ” or “#” the user dials is to be checked or not on the  
Call Barring code in program [125] “Call Barring Check for and #”. This is useful to  
prevent unauthorised calls which could be possible through certain Local Exchange  
systems.  
• Required System Programming  
☞
[301] Call Barring – System Speed Dialling Boundary Class  
[302]-[305] Call Barring – Classes 2 through 5 Denied Codes  
[306] Call Barring – Exception Codes  
[601]-[603] Call Barring – Class of Service Assignment – Day/Night/Lunch  
• Related Feature References  
Emergency Call  
Call Barring – Extension Lock Boundary Class  
Call Barring for System Speed Dialling  
Call Barring Override by Account Codes  
Features  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
C
Combination of denied codes and exception codes  
COS No.  
Denied Calls  
No restriction.  
20 denied codes programmed in [302].  
Excepted Calls  
No restriction.  
80 exception codes (code numbers 01-80)  
programmed in [306].  
1
2
3
4
20 denied codes programmed in [302] plus 60 exception codes (code numbers 01-60)  
20 denied codes programmed in [303]. programmed in [306].  
20 denied codes programmed in [302] plus 40 exception codes (code numbers 01-40)  
20 denied codes programmed in [303] plus programmed in [306].  
20 denied codes programmed in [304].  
5
20 denied codes programmed in [302] plus 20 exception codes (code numbers 01-20)  
20 denied codes programmed in [303] plus programmed in [306].  
20 denied codes programmed in [304] plus  
20 denied codes programmed in [305].  
Flow chart of Call Barring  
The user makes a toll call.  
*1  
Is it a System Speed Dialling number?  
Yes  
No  
*2  
Yes  
Is the COS number higher than the  
system speed dialling boundary class?  
No or Equal  
COS1  
What is the  
COS number?  
COS2 - 5  
Is the dialled number found  
in applicable denied codes?  
No  
Yes  
*1: System Speed Dialling  
numbers are assigned in  
program [001] “System  
Speed Dialling Entry”.  
*2: The system speed dialling  
boundary class is assigned in  
program [301] “Call Barring  
– System Speed Dialling  
Boundary Class”.  
Is the dialled number found in  
applicable exception codes?  
Yes  
No  
The call is allowed.  
The call is denied. A reorder  
tone is returned to the user.  
3-12  
Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
C
Call Barring — Extension Lock Boundary Class  
Allows assigning a call barring class for extensions where the Electronic Extension Lockout  
or Remote Extension Lock feature has been set.  
An extension user usually cannot make an outside call at a locked extension, however if a  
call barring class is assigned in program [312], the user can make an outside call at the  
locked extension.  
• The higher call barring class number will take precedence.  
For example, if call barring COS number 3 is assigned to an extension and the extension  
lock boundary class is 4, the extension user is allowed to make a call with call barring  
COS number 4.  
!
• Required System Program Address  
☞
[312] Call Barring – Extension Lock Boundary Class  
• Related Feature References  
Extension Lock, Call Barring  
Call Barring for System Speed Dialling  
Calls originated by System Speed Dialling are restricted depending on the combination of  
the System Speed Dialling Boundary Class assigned in program [301] and the class of  
service (COS) assigned to each extension as follows.  
System Speed  
Boundary  
Dialling  
Class  
COS  
No.  
<Example>  
—If the boundary is set to  
COS number 2,  
1
A
C
C
C
C
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
A
A
C
C
C
A
A
A
C
C
A
A
A
A
C
A
A
A
A
A
The system will allow system  
speed dialling for COS numbers 1  
and 2, but check COS numbers 3,  
4 and 5 according to call barring.  
A: allowed  
C: checked  
• Required System Programming  
☞
[301] Call Barring – System Speed Dialling Boundary Class  
• Related Feature Reference  
Call Barring  
Features  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
C
Call Barring Override by Account Codes  
Allows an extension user to override call barring temporarily to make a toll call from a  
toll-restricted extension. The user can carry out this feature by entering one of the account  
codes programmed in [310] “Account Codes” before dialling the telephone number. The  
user can make a toll call with the COS number 2.  
• The account code “Verify-toll (call barring)” mode at an extension permits users to  
override their call barrings.  
• This feature can be used on extensions assigned to call barring COS numbers 3 through  
5. The COS numbers 1 and 2 will not be changed.  
!
• If the user does not enter an account code or enters an invalid one, a regular call barring  
check is done.  
• When a user makes a call using this feature, it will appear on the SMDR printout with  
either the entered 4-digit account code or the 2-digit index of the entered account code.  
This selection is set in program [805].  
• Users can also override call barring of another extension by using the Walking COS  
feature.  
Flow chart of Call Barring Override  
Call Barring Override by Account Codes is attempted.  
Verify–All  
Option/Forced  
What is the account code mode?  
Verify–Toll  
Does the entered code match  
a stored account code?  
Does the entered code match  
a stored account code?  
No  
Yes  
Is the COS number 1?  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
The call is made with the  
COS number 2.  
The call is not allowed.  
A reorder tone is  
returned to the user.  
The Call Barring COS  
number remains the same as  
the extension being used.  
• Required System Programming  
[310] Account Codes  
☞
[605] Account Code Entry Mode  
[805] SMDR Account Codes Selection  
• Related Feature References  
Account Code Entry, Call Barring, Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR),  
Walking COS  
3-14  
Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
C
Call Forwarding  
Allows an extension user to transfer incoming calls automatically to another extension or to  
an external destination. The following types are available.  
All Calls:  
All incoming calls are forwarded to another extension.  
Busy or No Answer: All incoming calls are forwarded to another extension when the  
extension user does not answer within the programmed time in  
[202] or when the extension is busy.  
To an Exchange Line: Allows an extension user enabled in program [607] to forward all  
incoming intercom calls to an external party.  
Follow Me:  
Allows an extension user to set the Call Forwarding – All Calls  
feature from another extension.  
• Extensions which have already been assigned as  
a forwarded destination cannot set the Call  
Forwarding feature.  
!
• If the Do Not Disturb (DND) feature has  
already been set, setting the Call Forwarding  
feature will cancel DND.  
• When using the call forward to an exchange line feature the quality of service may be  
adversely affected by the attenuation across the public telephone network.  
• Required System Programming  
[202] Call Forwarding Start Time  
☞
[607] Call Forwarding to an Exchange Line  
• Related Feature Reference  
Limited Call Duration  
• Operating Instructions References  
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone”,  
FWD/DND (Forward/Do Not Disturb) Button  
1.6 Before Leaving Your Desk, “Forwarding a Call (Call Forwarding)”  
Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection  
The Calling Party Control (CPC) signal is a disconnect signal sent from the Local Exchange  
for an outside call. The CPC signal detection is activated by programs [420] and [421].  
Program [420] is for incoming outside calls, and [421] is for outgoing outside calls.  
• Required System Programming  
☞
[420] Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal  
[421] CPC Detection for Outgoing Calls  
Features  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
C
Call Park  
Allows an extension user to place a held call into a system parking area. Any extension user  
can retrieve the parked call to perform other operations. Up to 10 calls can be parked at the  
same time.  
• If a parked call is not retrieved within the assigned time in program [200], a ring tone or  
an alarm tone will be heard.  
• If a parked call is not retrieved within 30 minutes, it will be automatically disconnected.  
• This feature is useful when an extension user wants to hold more than one intercom call  
with a proprietary telephone, or more than one intercom call or outside call with a single  
line telephone.  
!
• During a 5-party conference, this feature cannot be performed.  
• Required System Programming  
Parking zone  
☞
[200] Hold Recall Time  
• Related Feature Reference  
Conference (5-party)  
• Operating Instructions Reference  
1.5 During Conversation, “Placing  
a Call in System Parking Area  
(Call Park)”  
3-16  
Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
C
Call Pickup  
<Directed Call Pickup>  
Allows an extension user to answer a call ringing at any other extension.  
<Group Call Pickup>  
Allows an extension user to answer a call ringing at another extension, if the call is ringing  
within the user’s extension group assigned in program [600]. If “Enable” is selected for an  
extension group in [127], persons in the group can pickup calls just by going off-hook, even  
though their extension is not ringing.  
<Call Pickup Deny>  
Allows an extension user to prevent other extensions from picking up a call ringing at the  
user’s extension with the Call Pickup feature.  
<Call Retrieving from a TAM (Telephone Answering Machine)>  
Allows an extension user to answer an incoming call received by a TAM extension assigned  
in program [611].  
• The user can pick up an incoming outside, intercom or doorphone call with the Directed  
Call Pickup or Group Call Pickup feature.  
• A confirmation tone is sent to the user when the call is picked up with the Directed Call  
Pickup or Group Call Pickup feature. The tone can be disabled in program [117].  
• If a ringing extension sets the Call Pickup Deny feature, an extension user will hear a  
reorder tone when the user tries to pick up the call.  
!
• Required System Programming  
☞
[117] Call Pickup Tone  
[127] Pickup Group Set  
[600] Extension Group Assignment  
[611] TAM (Telephone Answering Machine)  
Extension  
He’s not in.  
I’ll answer it.  
Hello.  
Sorry, Mr. Smith is  
out of the office.  
• Operating Instructions Reference  
1.4 Receiving Calls, “Picking up a Call  
Ringing at Another Extension  
(Call Pickup)”  
Call Splitting  
Allows an extension user to talk to 2 different parties. If a call is received while the user is  
already on the line, the user can place the current call on hold and have a conversation with  
the other party.  
• This feature is not possible for a doorphone call, page or 5-party conference.  
!
• Related Feature References  
☞
Conference (5-party), Doorphone Call, Paging  
• Operating Instructions Reference  
1.5 During Conversation, “Call Splitting”  
Features  
3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
C
Call Transfer – to Exchange Line  
Allows an extension user enabled in program [606] to transfer a received intercom call to an  
external party.  
• A single line telephone user cannot transfer a received call to an external party.  
• To join the conversation again after transferring the call, press the corresponding line key.  
A conference call will be established. This feature is not available for a single line  
telephone.  
!
• Required System Programming  
☞
[606] Call Transfer to an Exchange Line  
• Related Feature Reference  
Hold, Limited Call Duration  
• Operating Instructions Reference  
1.5 During Conversation, “Transferring a Call to an Exchange Line (Call Transfer – to  
Exchange Line)”  
Call Transfer – to Extension  
Allows an extension user to transfer a received call, an intercom or an outside call, to  
another extension. Two types are available.  
Screened Call Transfer: Announces the call to another extension before completing  
the transfer.  
Unscreened Call Transfer:Immediately releases the call to another extension without an  
announcement.  
• If the destination extension does not answer the call within the assigned time in program  
[201], the call will return to the transferring party.  
• An outside call can be transferred to an extension by simply pressing a DSS button. It  
requires program [005].  
!
• If Music on Hold is enabled, music is sent to the original external caller while being  
transferred. Sending a cyclic tone or music on hold can be programmed by program  
[111].  
• During a 5-party conference, the user cannot transfer a call.  
• Required System Programming  
[005] One-Touch Transfer Using a DSS Button  
[111] Hold Music Selection  
☞
[201] Transfer Recall Time  
• Related Feature References  
Conference (5-party), Hold, Music on Hold  
• Operating Instructions Reference  
1.5 During Conversation, “Transferring a Call to an Extension (Call Transfer – to  
Extension)”  
3-18  
Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
C
Call Waiting  
During a conversation, a Call Waiting tone informs an extension user that there is a call  
waiting. The user can answer the second call by disconnecting the first call or placing it on  
hold. When Call Waiting is enabled, a Call Waiting tone is sent to the user under the  
following conditions.  
1) When an outside call (except a doorphone  
call) is received, or  
CALL WAITING TONE  
I’ve got another call.  
Please hold.  
2) When another extension executes the Busy  
Extension Signalling feature.  
• For proprietary telephone users, a Call Waiting tone (Tone 1 or Tone 2) can be selected in  
the Proprietary Telephone Settings. Tone 2 depends on System Programming. Program  
[423] is for outside calls and program [115] is for intercom calls.  
!
15 s  
Tone 1  
5 s  
Tone 2  
Single:  
Double:  
Triple:  
• Required System Programming  
☞
[115] Extension Ringing Pattern Selection  
[423] Exchange Line Ringing Pattern Selection  
• Related Feature Reference  
Hold  
• Operating Instructions References  
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings,  
“Customising Your Telephone Functions”, Call Waiting Tone Selection  
1.5 During Conversation, “Call Waiting”  
Features  
3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
C
Conference (3-party)  
During a 2-party conversation, an extension user can add a third party to make a 3-party  
conference. The maximum number of members of a conference can be programmed in  
program [116].  
• The possible combinations, through System Programming, are 3 extensions, 1 extension  
and 2 external parties, or 2 extensions and 1 external party.  
• When a 2-party call is changed to a 3-party call or vice versa, a confirmation tone is sent  
to all 3 parties. The tone can be disabled by program [105].  
!
• A 3-party call can also be established by the Executive Busy Override feature.  
• Required System Programming  
[105] Conference Tone  
☞
[116] Conference Pattern Selection  
[606] Call Transfer to an Exchange Line  
• Related Feature References  
Executive Busy Override  
• Operating Instructions References  
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone”,  
CONF (Conference) Button  
1.7 Useful Features, “Conference (3-party)”  
3-20  
Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
C-D  
Conference (5-party)  
Allows an extension user to establish a 5-party conference when “5 party C-2 E-5” is  
selected in program [116].  
• Up to 2 external parties can participate in a conference call.  
• All 5 parties can be extensions.  
• Only one 5-party conference can be established at one time.  
• When a 5-party conference is established, a confirmation tone is sent to all parties. The  
tone can be disabled by program [105].  
!
• The Executive Busy Override and the Call Park features are not available during a 5-party  
conference.  
• Required System Programming  
[105] Conference Tone  
☞
[116] Conference Pattern Selection  
• Related Feature References  
Conference (3-party), Call Park, Executive Busy Override  
• Operating Instructions References  
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone”,  
CONF (Conference) Button  
1.7 Useful Features, “Conference (5-party)”  
Data Line Security  
Prevents an extension user from being interrupted by the Call Waiting and Executive Busy  
Override features. This feature also prevents a ring tone or an alarm tone from being sent  
when a call is kept waiting longer than a pre-determined time. Data communication devices,  
such as computers and facsimiles, connected to an extension port can operate without  
interruptions.  
• Related Feature References  
☞
Call Waiting, Executive Busy Override  
• Operating Instructions Reference  
1.7 Useful Features, “Data Line Security”  
Features  
3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
D
Date and Time Setting  
A manager or operator can adjust the current time.  
• Required System Programming  
☞
[000] Date and Time Setting  
• Operating Instructions Reference  
1.8 Operator / Manager Service Features, “Date and Time Setting”  
Direct In Line (DIL)  
Enables an incoming outside call to go directly to a specified extension. This exchange line  
can be used by multiple extension users to make a call, but can only be used by one  
extension to receive a call. DIL can have a different destination in the day, night and/or  
lunch modes.  
• If the destination extension is in an extension group which has  
enabled the Extension Hunting feature in program [100] “Hunting  
Group Set”, Extension Hunting (Terminate or Circular in program  
[101] “Hunting Type”) works when the extension is busy.  
!
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
• Required System Programming  
☞
[414]–[416] Exchange Line Mode — Day/Night/Lunch  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
• Related Feature References  
Extension Hunting, Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service  
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)  
Allows an outside caller to access specific system features as if the caller is an extension in  
the system. The caller can have direct access to features such as:  
• Placing an incoming call to an extension, extension group or operator. The caller also  
has the option of dialling the route for an extension using a 1 digit number (DISA built-  
in auto attendant number) via DISA calls.  
The DISA feature operates without an optional card installed. If an outgoing message  
(OGM) which greets a caller and gives information, or fax detection is required, an optional  
OGM/FAX Detection Card must be installed. The system can detect a FAX (CNG) tone  
according to program [514]. An OGM can be programmed in program [502] (☞ “Outgoing  
Message (OGM)” in this section). When a caller reaches a DISA line, a message will greet  
the caller. Two different DISA messages can be recorded by the operator or manager. For  
example, one message can be used in day mode and the other in night mode, or they can be  
used for different exchange lines. If an optional OGM/FAX Detection Card is not installed,  
the caller will hear a short beep instead of the OGM (Internal DISA).  
3-22  
Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
D
• “DISA1” or “DISA 2” must be assigned to exchange line(s) as the exchange line mode in  
programs [414] through [416].  
• After the DISA Delayed Answer Time assigned in program [504] expires and a ringback  
tone is returned to the caller, a DISA call will be answered. The caller can dial during the  
message or after the tone.  
!
• This system can store up to 10 programmable DISA built-in auto attendant numbers in  
program [501]. Each number is 1 digit.  
• The DISA built-in auto attendant number may be the same as the first digit of other  
numbers (extension number, etc.). To avoid confusion, the system waits for the second  
digit for a preprogrammed amount of time in program [517] (default: 2 seconds). If the  
timer expires, the system will assume that the first digit is a DISA built-in auto attendant  
number.  
• Only one OGM/FAX Detection Card can be installed .  
• Connection Reference  
☞
2.15 OGM/FAX Detection Card Installation  
• Required System Programming  
To enable the DISA feature  
[414]–[416] Exchange Line Mode — Day/Night/Lunch  
[420] Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal  
[500] DISA Incoming Dialling Mode Selection  
[501] DISA Built-in Auto Attendant  
[502] OGM Mode Selection  
[503] FAX Connection  
[506] DISA Busy Mode  
[510] DISA No Dial Mode  
[513] Cyclic Tone Detection  
[514] FAX Tone Detection  
[516] DISA Incoming Assignment  
To set DISA timer values  
[504] DISA Delayed Answer Time  
[505] DISA Waiting Time after OGM  
[517] DISA AA Wait Time  
[519] DISA OGM Mute Time  
To enable the Intercept Routing feature  
[408]–[410] Flexible Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch  
[507] DISA Intercept Mode  
[508] DISA Ringing Time before Intercept  
[509] DISA Ringing Time after Intercept  
[515] Intercept Time for Internal DISA  
• Related Feature References  
Extension Hunting,  
Intercept Routing, Outgoing Message (OGM)  
Features  
3-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
D
DISA Operation  
Calling an extension by following the outgoing message  
from an External Party  
DISA phone no.  
extension no.  
Ringback tone and  
Enter the extension number.  
Ring back tone  
Enter the DISA phone number.  
DISA outgoing message  
• You can dial the AA number* instead.  
Calling an extension without an outgoing message (Internal DISA)  
from an External Party  
DISA phone no.  
extension no.  
Ringback tone  
and  
Enter the extension number.  
Ring back tone  
Enter the DISA phone number.  
one short beep  
• You can dial the AA number* instead.  
AA number*: A DISA built-in auto attendant number assigned in program [501] “DISA Built-in Auto  
Attendant”.  
3-24  
Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
D
Flow chart of possible cases and results for DISA calls  
An exchange line call is made.  
*1  
The caller reaches the DISA line.  
With optional  
OGM/FAX Detection Card  
Without optional  
OGM/FAX Detection Card  
(Internal DISA)  
*2  
*11  
One short beep  
OGM  
*12  
C
*3  
*16  
Cyclic tone,  
CPC signal  
FAX (CNG) tone  
*13  
*4  
A number is dialled.  
Nothing is dialled.  
The call is sent to  
the fax extension.  
Disconnect  
*14  
Is Intercept Routing employed?  
Yes  
Busy tone  
No  
The call is sent to  
another extension.  
The call reaches the destination.  
*5  
Disconnect.  
*15  
A
Answered.  
*7  
The destination  
extension(s) is(are) busy.  
The call is not answered.  
Answered.  
B
Answered.  
The call is not  
answered.  
*6  
Is Intercept Routing employed?  
*8  
What is the DISA  
Busy Mode?  
The call is not  
answered for  
40 seconds.  
Yes  
No  
Disconnect.  
The call is sent to  
another extension.  
Disconnect  
Busy tone  
DISA2  
Call Waiting  
Disconnect.  
The other  
OGM is heard.  
*9  
Goes to  
A
Disconnect.  
*10  
Goes to  
C
Answered.  
The call is not  
answered.  
Goes to  
B
Note: The explanation for *1 through *16 is on the next page.  
Features  
3-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
D
*1: The DISA Delayed timer starts. This is the time between a call reaching the system and being  
received. The time is assigned in program [504].  
*2: When the assigned time period in program [519] expires, the system sends a short beep to the  
caller.  
*3: The Intercept Timer for Internal DISA starts. This is the time the system waits for the number  
sent by the caller. If nothing is entered by the caller during this time, the system will regard it as  
“Nothing is dialled.” The time is assigned in program [515].  
*4: The system can accept the following numbers:  
• 200 through 299 as an extension number.  
• 0 or 9 as the operator call number when the operator is assigned in program  
[008] “Operator Assignment” and “Without AA” is assigned in program [500]. Even if “With  
AA” is assigned, 0 or 9 is regarded as the operator call number if nothing is assigned to “0” or  
“9” in program [501].  
• 0 through 9 as a built-in auto attendant number when “With AA” is assigned in program [500].  
The DISA AA Wait timer starts after receiving the first 1-digit number. If the timer expires, the  
system will assume that the first digit is an AA number. The time is assigned in program [517].  
*5: The DISA Ring Timer Before Intercept starts. The destination telephone(s) will ring for the time  
programmed in [508].  
*6: The system treats the call according to program [507] as follows.  
• Disconnect – the call is disconnected.  
• Intercept – the call is sent to the extensions programmed in [408]-[410] “Flexible Ringing  
Assignment – Day/Night/Lunch”.  
If the call is still not answered within the time programmed in [509], it will be disconnected.  
*7: If the destination extension belongs to a hunting group and all extensions in the group are busy,  
the system will check the DISA Busy Mode. If the destination is a DISA ring group, the DISA  
Busy Mode will not work for the call. The system regards the call as unanswered.  
*8: The DISA Busy Mode is selected in program [506]. There are 3 modes as follows.  
• Disconnect – the caller hears a busy tone and a call is disconnected.  
• Call Waiting – the destination extension hears a call waiting tone if they have enabled Call  
Waiting.  
• DISA2 – if “MODE2” is assigned in program [502] and a message is recorded in OGM2, the  
caller will hear the message and the system waits for the new destination.  
3-26  
Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
D
*9: The DISA Ring Timer Before Intercept starts. The destination telephone(s) will ring for the time  
programmed in [508].  
*10: In this case, the system does not accept a line access code. If nothing is recorded in OGM2 or  
OGM2 is used for another caller, the caller will hear a busy tone and the call is disconnected.  
*11: The OGM is sent to the caller according to programs [414]–[416] and [502] when the assigned  
time in program [519] expires. If an OGM is not recorded, the DISA Wait Timer After OGM  
programmed in [505] starts immediately.  
When the system detects a FAX (CNG) tone while the OGM is being sent, the call is sent to the  
FAX extension assigned in program [503]. When the system detects a cyclic tone or CPC signal  
while the OGM is being sent, the call is disconnected.  
*12: The DISA Wait Timer After OGM starts. The system waits for a number from the caller during  
the time assigned in program [505]. When the system detects a FAX (CNG) tone during the  
programmed time, the call is sent to the FAX extension. When the system detects a cyclic tone  
or CPC signal during the programmed time, the call is disconnected.  
*13: After the DISA Wait Timer After OGM or the Intercept Timer for Internal DISA expires, the  
system regards that nothing was dialled.  
*14: The system treats the call according to program [510] as follows.  
• Disconnect – the call is disconnected.  
• Intercept – the call is sent to the extensions programmed in [408]-[410]. If all extensions are  
assigned to “Disable”, the call will be disconnected.  
*15: The DISA Ring Timer After Intercept starts. The destination telephone(s) will ring for the time  
programmed in [509]. If the call is not answered during the programmed time, the call will be  
disconnected.  
*16: The FAX extension assigned in program [503] receives the call. When the extension is busy, the  
system sends a busy tone to the sending FAX. If the call is not answered after 40 seconds, the  
call will be disconnected.  
Program [514] sets how many times the FAX (CNG) tone must be detected before the system  
recognises the incoming signal as facsimile data.  
Features  
3-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
D
Display Contrast Adjustment  
(KX-T7130 only)  
Allows a display proprietary telephone user to adjust the display contrast with the  
CONTRAST selector.  
• Operating Instructions Reference  
☞
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Display Contrast Adjustment”  
Distinctive Dial Tones  
An extension user will hear 3 types of dial tone patterns which give information about the  
features activated on the telephone.  
Dial Tone 1: This is a normal dial tone. None of the features listed in Dial Tone 2 are  
activated.  
1 s  
Dial Tone 2: Sent when any of the following features are set.  
• Absent Message Capability  
• Background Music (BGM)  
(for proprietary telephones only)  
• Call Pickup Deny  
• Call Forwarding  
• Data Line Security  
• Electronic Extension Lockout  
• Do Not Disturb (DND)  
• Message Waiting  
(for proprietary telephones only)  
• Remote Extension Lock Control  
• Pickup Dialling  
(for single line telephones only)  
• Timed Reminder  
1 s  
Dial Tone 3: Sent when making an Account Code Entry and answering a Timed  
Reminder call. Also sent when going off-hook with a single line telephone  
which has a message in a Voice Processing System.  
1 s  
• Operating Instructions Reference  
☞
1.7 Useful Features, “Distinctive Dial Tones”  
3-28  
Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
D
Do Not Disturb (DND)  
<Do Not Disturb (DND)>  
Allows an extension user to prevent other parties from disturbing them. The extension will  
not receive intercom or outside calls.  
<Do Not Disturb (DND) Override>  
Allows an extension user enabled in program [609] to call an extension which has set the Do  
Not Disturb (DND) feature.  
• If your proprietary telephone (PT) is not supplied with the FWD/DND button, it can be  
assigned to a flexible line key in the Proprietary Telephone Settings.  
• DND does not work for the following calls: Hold recall or Timed Reminder.  
• A PT user in the DND mode can answer a call by pressing the corresponding flashing  
button.  
!
• If the Call Forwarding feature has already been set, setting the DND feature will cancel  
Call Forwarding.  
• Required System Programming  
☞
[609] Do Not Disturb Override  
• Related Feature References  
Call Forwarding,  
Timed Reminder  
• Operating Instructions References  
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings,  
“Customising the Buttons on  
Your Telephone”,  
FWD/DND (Forward/Do Not Disturb) Button  
1.7 Useful Features, “Rejecting Incoming Calls (Do Not Disturb — DND)”  
1.7 Useful Features, “Calling an Extension which Denies Receiving Calls  
(Do Not Disturb Override)”  
Features  
3-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
D
Door Opener  
Up to 4 Door Openers can be connected to the system. The door can be unlocked by a pre-  
assigned extension users in programs [703]-[705].  
Could you please  
open the door?  
Panasonic  
Just a moment  
please.  
• An optional Doorphone/Door Opener Card must be installed to the system and a user-  
supplied door opener to the door to be opened. Four openers can be installed.  
• The door opener will open the door even if a doorphone is not installed.  
• The door opener timer can be modified in program [709].  
!
• Connection Reference  
☞
2.16 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection  
• Required System Programming  
[703]–[705] Door Opener Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch  
[709] Door Opener Time  
• Related Feature Reference  
Doorphone Call  
• Operating Instructions Reference  
1.7 Useful Features, “Door Opener”  
Doorphone Call  
Up to 4 Doorphones (KX-T30865) can be installed. If a visitor presses the doorphone  
button, a pre-assigned extension user in programs [700]-[702] can answer the call and talk to  
the visitor. Any extension user can call a doorphone. The doorphones are also used for the  
Room Monitor feature.  
• An optional Doorphone/Door Opener Card must be installed to the system and a  
doorphone. Four doorphones can be installed.  
• Doorphone 1 and 2 cannot be used simultaneously. When one is in use, an extension user  
cannot have a conversation with the other. Doorphone 3 and 4 are the same.  
• An access tone can be programmed in [707] to be sent to a monitored doorphone before  
room monitoring starts.  
!
• The ring tone from the doorphone call is programmable in [706].  
3-30  
Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
D
• Connection Reference  
☞
2.16 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection  
• Required System Programming  
[700]–[702] Doorphone Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch  
[706] Doorphone Ringing/Tone Pattern Selection  
[707] Doorphone Access Tone Selection  
[708] Doorphone Ringing Time  
• Related Feature References  
Door Opener, Room Monitor  
• Operating Instructions References  
1.7 Useful Features, “Room Monitor”  
1.7 Useful Features, “Doorphone Call”  
DSS Console  
The Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console provides direct access to extensions, a busy  
lamp display, as well as 16 PF (Programmable Feature) buttons.  
The DSS Console must be programmed to work with a proprietary telephone (PT). The port  
number of the DSS Console and its associated PT are assigned in programs [003] and [004].  
Up to 2 consoles can be installed per system.  
If a feature like One-Touch Dialling is assigned to a DSS button or PF button, accessing the  
feature can be done easily by pressing the corresponding button. This is very useful for an  
operator or manager. Refer to the Operating Instructions for more details.  
• Programming the DSS and PF buttons can be done only from the paired telephone.  
• Indicating the Forward (FWD) or Do Not Disturb (DND) status of corresponding  
extensions using a DSS button indication is programmable in [112].  
!
• Connection Reference  
☞
2.8 Extension Connection  
• Required System Programming  
[003] DSS Console Port Assignment  
[004] Paired Telephone Assignment for DSS Console  
[112] DSS Console Indication Mode  
• Operating Instructions Reference  
1.9 DSS Console Features  
Features  
3-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
E
Emergency Call  
Allows an extension user to access a pre-assigned emergency number which can be dialled  
regardless of any restrictions.  
• Up to 5 emergency numbers can be stored.  
• An emergency call is allowed even in the following cases;  
— in Account Code Modes (Verify–All and Forced modes),  
— in any call barring COS number, and  
!
— in Electronic Extension Lockout.  
• Required System Programming  
☞
[309] Emergency Dial Number Set  
• Related Feature References  
Account Code Entry, Call Barring, Extension Lock  
• Operating Instructions Reference  
1.3 Making Calls, “Making Emergency Calls (Emergency Call)”  
Exchange Line Ringing Selection  
When an outside call is received at an extension, the user can select whether their extension  
will ring or not.  
• Select “Enable” in programs [408]–[410].  
!
• Required System Programming  
☞
[408]–[410] “Flexible Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch  
• Operating Instructions Reference  
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising Your Telephone Functions”,  
Exchange Line Ringing Selection  
3-32  
Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
E
Executive Busy Override  
<Executive Busy Override – Extension>  
Allows an extension user enabled in program [608] to interrupt an existing intercom call. A  
3-party conference will be established.  
<Executive Busy Override – Exchange Line>  
Allows a proprietary telephone user enabled in program [608] to interrupt an existing outside  
call or add a third party. A 3-party conference will be established.  
<Executive Busy Override Deny>  
Allows an extension user to prevent other extension users from interrupting their  
conversation.  
• The Executive Busy Override feature will not work if the extension engaged the  
conversation has set Executive Busy Override Deny or Data Line Security.  
• When a 3-party call is changed to a 2-party call or vice versa, a confirmation tone will be  
sent to all parties. This tone can be disabled by program [105].  
!
• Required System Programming  
[105] Conference Tone  
☞
[608] Executive Busy Override  
• Related Feature Reference  
Conference (3-party)  
• Operating Instructions References  
1.3 Making Calls, “Interrupting an Existing Call (Executive Busy Override)”  
1.3 Making Calls, “Denying ‘Interrupting an Existing Call’  
(Executive Busy Override Deny)”  
Extension Button Confirmation  
(KX-T7130 only)  
Allows a display proprietary telephone user to confirm the values stored in the buttons, such  
as the REDIAL button or flexible line key, by pressing the corresponding button while  
on-hook.  
• Operating Instructions Reference  
☞
1.7 Useful Features “Extension Button Confirmation (KX-T7130 only)”  
Features  
3-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
E
Extension Feature Clear  
Allows an extension user to reset the following extension features to the default settings.  
• Absent Message Capability  
• Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On)  
• Background Music (BGM)  
• Call Forwarding  
• Call Pickup Deny  
• Call Waiting  
• Data Line Security  
• Do Not Disturb (DND)  
• Executive Busy Override Deny  
• Log-In/Log-Out  
• Message Waiting – (All messages will be erased.)  
• Pickup Dialling – (The stored telephone number will be erased.)  
• Paging Deny  
• Room Monitor  
• Timed Reminder  
• Voice Mail Integration  
• Operating Instructions Reference  
☞
1.7 Useful Features, “Cancelling the Feature Settings (Extension Feature Clear)”  
3-34  
Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
E
Extension Group  
The system supports 8 extension groups. In an extension group, the following features can  
be activated.  
• Group Call Pickup: Any member of an extension group can pick up a call directed to  
another member in the same group.  
• Paging – Group: Any member of an extension group can make a voice  
announcement to another group member.  
A hunting group, DISA ring group or UCD group is a specific extension group. The  
following operation as well as the features above can be activated for a hunting group, DISA  
ring group or UCD group.  
Hunting Group  
An extension group enabled in program [100] “Hunting Group Set” will perform the  
Extension Hunting feature. See “Extension Hunting” in this section.  
DISA Ring Group  
All extensions in a DISA ring group assigned as an auto attendant destination in  
program [501] “DISA Built-in Auto Attendant” will ring simultaneously. Selecting  
“DISA1” or “DISA2” in programs [414]–[416] “Exchange Line Mode —  
Day/Night/Lunch” is required. Also, you must select “With AA” in program [500]  
“DISA Incoming Dialling Mode Selection”.  
UCD Group  
One extension group assigned as the UCD group in program [520] “UCD Group” can  
be the destination of incoming outside calls via the UCD feature. Selecting “UCD” in  
programs [414]–[416] “Exchange Line Mode — Day/Night/Lunch” is required.  
• Required System Program Address  
☞
[600] Extension Group Assignment  
• Related Feature References  
Call Pickup, Direct Inward System Access (DISA), Extension Hunting,  
Paging, Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)  
Features  
3-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
E
Extension Hunting  
If a called extension is busy, Extension Hunting redirects the incoming call to an idle  
extension in an extension group in numerical order. Idle extensions are automatically hunted  
according to programming. The following 2 hunting types are available.  
Circular hunting:  
The extensions are hunted one time in numerical order. If all  
extensions are busy, a busy tone will be heard.  
Terminate hunting: The extensions are hunted until the extension which has the  
highest port number in the group is reached. If all higher order  
numbers are busy, the search will end and a busy tone will be  
heard.  
• One hunting type can be selected for each extension group.  
• To leave the hunting group temporarily, use the Log-Out feature. To rejoin, use the  
Log-In feature.  
• If the called extension has set Do Not Disturb (DND), Call Forwarding or Log-Out,  
Extension Hunting will skip the extension. However, Extension Hunting will not skip the  
extension which receives the call first, even if it has set Do Not Disturb (DND) or Call  
Forwarding.  
!
Circular Hunting  
Terminate  
• Required System Programming  
[100] Hunting Group Set  
☞
[101] Hunting Type  
[600] Extension Group Assignment  
• Related Feature References  
Call Forwarding  
Do Not Disturb (DND)  
Extension Group  
Log-In/Log-Out  
Busy Tone  
Extension Lock  
<Electronic Extension Lockout>  
Allows an extension user to lock their extension so that other users  
cannot make outside calls until it is unlocked. Any 4-digit code can  
be used to lock and unlock an extension.  
<Electronic Extension Lockout – CANCEL ALL>  
The operator and manager can cancel Electronic Extension Lockout  
of all extensions at one time.  
<Remote Extension Lock Control>  
The operator and manager are given the privilege of controlling Electronic Extension  
Lockout at any extension by using the DSS console. The operator and manager can see the  
status of each extension, locked or unlocked, by the pre-assigned DSS button LED on the  
DSS console. For example, this feature is useful for a small hotel or motel when guests are  
checked out.  
3-36  
Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
E
• The Remote Extension Lock Control overrides the Electronic Extension Lockout. If the  
operator or manager sets Remote Extension Lock on an extension that has already been  
locked by the extension user, the user cannot unlock it.  
• A call barring class can be assigned to an extension which has set the Electronic  
Extension Lockout and Remote Extension Lock Control features in program [312] “Call  
Barring – Extension Lock Boundary Class”. Certain types of outgoing outside calls are  
allowed depending on the assigned call barring class.  
!
• Operating Instructions References  
☞
1.6 Before Leaving Your Desk, “Locking Your Telephone (Electronic Extension  
Lockout)”  
1.8 Operator / Manager Service Features, “Electronic Extension Lockout – CANCEL  
ALL”  
1.8 Operator / Manager Service Features, “Remote Extension Lock”  
1.9 DSS Console Features “Initial Settings”, Extension Lock Button Assignment  
(Operator/Manager only)  
Extension Password / System Password  
The extension password assigned by the manager (extension port 01) to each extension can  
be used for the Walking COS feature.  
The system password is used for entering System Programming and also before assigning  
the extension password.  
• Required System Programming  
☞
[002] System Password  
• Related Feature References  
Walking COS  
• Operating Instructions Reference  
1.8 Operator / Manager Service Features, “Extension Password Set (Manager only)”  
Features  
3-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
E
External Feature Access  
Allows an extension user to access special features (e.g. Call Waiting) offered by the Local  
Exchange or host PBX. This is done by placing the current call on hold and sending a recall  
signal using either the RECALL button or the feature number. This feature is effective only  
during an outside call.  
• When “MODE2” is selected in program [110] and the RECALL button is pressed for  
longer than the time programmed in [418], this feature will not work.  
• The recall time must be assigned in program [418] as required by the host PBX or  
exchange line.  
!
• Required System Programming  
[110] Recall Key Mode  
[418] Recall Time  
☞
• Related Feature References  
Host PBX Access, Recall  
• Operating Instructions Reference  
1.7 Useful Features, “External Feature Access”  
3-38  
Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
F
Flexible Buttons  
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can change the flexible buttons on the telephone and DSS  
console to certain function buttons. For example, if the telephone has more line keys than  
available exchange lines, the unused line keys may be changed to One-Touch Dialling  
buttons, etc.  
The 4 types of flexible buttons are as follows:  
• Flexible line keys (located on a PT only)  
• Flexible DSS Buttons (located on a DSS Console only)  
• Programmable Feature (PF) Buttons (located on a PT and DSS Console)  
• Flexible MESSAGE Buttons  
Check the required operation first. If the telephone is not provided with the button, assigning  
the button can be performed in the Proprietary Telephone Settings.  
Programmable Button  
Function  
LINE  
DSS  
PF  
MESSAGE  
DSS (Direct Station Selection)  
One-Touch Dialling  
CONF (Conference)  
FWD/DND (Forward/Do Not Disturb)  
SAVE  
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Log-In/Log-Out  
Single Exchange Line (S-CO)  
Other Exchange Line (O-CO)  
Trunk Group (G-CO)  
MESSAGE (Message Waiting)  
Day  
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Night  
Lunch  
Extension Lock  
“✔” indicates that the feature is available.  
•
Operating Instructions Reference  
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone”  
☞
Features  
3-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
H
Handsfree Answerback  
Allows a proprietary telephone with a speakerphone to answer an intercom call without  
lifting the handset. This feature performed by pressing the AUTO ANSWER/MUTE button.  
• This feature does not work for incoming outside calls or doorphone calls.  
!
• Operating Instructions Reference  
☞
1.4 Receiving Calls, “Handsfree Answerback”  
Handsfree Operation  
Allows a proprietary telephone user to dial and talk to the other party without lifting the  
handset. Pressing one of the following buttons activates the handsfree mode when the  
SP-PHONE/MONITOR button indicator is off:  
SP-PHONE button, MONITOR button, INTERCOM button, or line key.  
• The KX-T7050 can perform handsfree dialling operations, etc., but cannot have a  
handsfree conversation.  
!
• Operating Instructions Reference  
☞
1.3 Making Calls, “Handsfree Operation”  
Hold  
<Call Hold>  
Allows an extension user to place an intercom and/or outside call on hold. The held call can  
be retrieved by the user who held it, or by any other extension (Call Hold Retrieve).  
With a single line telephone (SLT), either one outside or intercom call can be held at one  
time. If an SLT user wants to hold both calls, use the Call Park feature. An SLT user can  
select how to operate the Call Hold feature by program [104].  
<Exclusive Hold>  
Allows a proprietary telephone user to prevent other extension users from retrieving their  
held call. Only the user who held the call can retrieve it. This feature is not available for an  
SLT.  
3-40  
Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
H
• Only one intercom call can be placed on hold. For a proprietary telephone, outside calls  
and one intercom call can be placed on hold at the same time.  
!
• If a held call is not retrieved within the assigned time in program [200], the extension  
user who held it will hear a ring tone or an alarm tone. If the user is on-hook and their  
SP-PHONE/MONITOR button indicator is off, the phone will ring (Hold Recall). If the  
user is off-hook or in the handsfree mode, an alarm tone will be sent to the built-in  
speaker of a proprietary telephone or the handset receiver of a single line telephone at  
15-second intervals (Hold Alarm). If “Disable” is selected in program [200], nothing will  
be heard.  
• If a held outside call is not answered within thirty minutes, it will be automatically  
disconnected.  
• For outside calls, music is sent to the external party on hold, if available (Music on Hold).  
• During a 5-party conference, the Hold feature cannot be activated.  
• Required System Programming  
[104] Hold Mode Selection  
[200] Hold Recall Time  
☞
• Related Feature References  
Call Park, Music on Hold/Background Music (BGM),  
Recall Button on a Single Line Telephone  
• Operating Instructions References  
1.5 During a Conversation, “Placing a Call on Hold (Call Hold)”  
1.5 During a Conversation, “Placing a Call on Hold Exclusively (Exclusive Hold)”  
1.5 During a Conversation, “Retrieving a Call on Hold (Call Hold Retrieve)”  
Host PBX Access  
The system may be installed behind an existing host PBX. This is performed by connecting  
a line from the host to an exchange line in the system.  
• A Host PBX Access code assigned in program [403] is required to access an exchange  
line of the host PBX.  
• Access to the host PBX during a conversation is also possible (External Feature Access).  
!
• Required System Programming  
[403] Host PBX Access Codes  
[417] Pause Time  
☞
• Related Feature Reference  
External Feature Access  
To Central Office  
Host PBX  
Features  
3-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
I
Intercept Routing  
Provides automatic redirection of incoming outside calls via the DISA or UCD feature. The  
Intercept Routing feature works in the following 2 cases.  
1) When nothing is dialled after a dial tone or OGM is sent to the caller. (The DISA feature  
only)  
2) When the call is not answered within a programmed time. This is called Intercept  
Routing – No Answer (IRNA).  
• Required System Programming  
[408]–[410] Flexible Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch  
[507] DISA Intercept Mode  
☞
[508] DISA Ringing Time before Intercept  
[509] DISA Ringing Time after Intercept  
[510] DISA No Dial Mode  
[523] UCD Busy Mode  
[524] UCD Intercept Mode  
[525] UCD Ringing Time before Intercept  
[526] UCD Ringing Time after Intercept  
• Related Feature References  
Direct Inward System Access (DISA), Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)  
Intercom Calling  
Allows an extension user to make a call to another extension.  
• An extension number and a name can be assigned in programs [009] and [604]. If  
assigned, they will be shown on the display proprietary telephone during an intercom call.  
• The DSS buttons permit a proprietary telephone user one-touch access to an extension.  
The DSS function can be assigned to a flexible line key in the Proprietary Telephone  
Settings.  
!
The DSS buttons on the DSS console can also be used.  
• An extension user can press the DSS buttons directly to make an intercom call without  
going off-hook. This can be enabled by program [126].  
• Required System Programming  
[009] Extension Number Assignment  
[126] DSS Off-Hook Mode  
☞
[604] Extension Name Setting  
• Operating Instructions References  
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone”,  
DSS (Direct Station Selection) Button  
1.3 Making Calls, “Intercom Calling”  
1.9 DSS Console Features, “Initial Settings”, Extension Number Assignment  
3-42  
Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
L
Language Selection  
The selected language in program [615] is shown on the LCD display of a proprietary  
telephone during operation and Proprietary Telephone Settings, but not used during System  
Programming. The selected language in program [806] is used for an SMDR printout.  
• Required System Programming  
[615] LCD Language Assignment  
[806] SMDR Language Assignment  
☞
Limited Call Duration  
The system disconnects outside outgoing calls when a specific timer expires. The timer is in  
effect when making an outside call, transferring an intercom call to an exchange line or  
forwarding an intercom call to an exchange line. Limiting the time of the call can be  
assigned through System Programming.  
• An alarm tone will be sent to both parties 15 seconds before the assigned time limit.  
!
• Required System Programming  
☞
[212] Exchange line Duration Time Limit  
[613] Exchange line Duration Time Limit Selection  
• Related Feature References  
Call Forwarding, Call Transfer – to Exchange line  
Line Access Keys  
A proprietary telephone (PT) user must assign one of the following 3 types of line keys to  
flexible line keys in the Proprietary Telephone Settings. This permits making or receiving  
outside calls. The default setting for the flexible line keys (CO 1 – CO 6) are Single  
Exchange Line (S-CO) keys. CO 1 corresponds to exchange line 1, CO 2 corresponds to  
exchange line 2, etc.  
<Trunk Group (G-CO) Key>  
Receiving or making outside calls is on an trunk group basis. The trunk group is assigned in  
program [404]. Any incoming call from any exchange line in the trunk group arrives at the  
G-CO key. To make an outside call, the user can access an idle exchange line in the group  
by simply pressing the assigned G-CO key.  
<Single Exchange Line (S-CO) Key>  
Receiving or making outside calls is done using a specific exchange line. An incoming call  
from the specific exchange line arrives at the S-CO key. To make an outside call, the user  
can access the specific exchange line by simply pressing the assigned S-CO key.  
<Other Exchange Line (O-CO) Key>  
Exchange lines, which are not assigned to an S-CO or G-CO key, can be assigned to a  
flexible line key as the O-CO key. An incoming call on an exchange lines arrives at the  
O-CO. To make an outside call, the user simply presses the assigned O-CO key.  
Features  
3-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
L
• The same trunk group can be assigned to more than one G-CO key on the same PT.  
• The same line can be assigned to an S-CO key and G-CO key. The  
S-CO key has priority.  
• Immediate, delayed, no ringing or no incoming calls (disable) can be selected by  
programs [408] through [413] on an extension-exchange line basis.  
• A ringing pattern can be selected for each exchange line by program [423].  
!
• Required System Programming  
☞
[400] Exchange Line Connection Assignment  
[404] Trunk Group Assignment  
[405]–[407] Flexible Outward Dialling Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch  
[408]–[410] Flexible Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch  
[411]–[413] Delayed Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch  
[423] Exchange Line Ringing Pattern Selection  
• Related Feature References  
Outside Calling, Receiving Calls, Ringing Pattern Selection  
• Operating Instructions Reference  
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone”,  
Line Access Keys  
Log-In/Log-Out  
Allows an extension user to Log-In (join) or Log-Out (leave) a hunting, DISA ring or UCD  
group temporarily. Extensions in the log-out mode will not receive calls by Extension  
Hunting, DISA or UCD but will receive other calls, not like the Do Not Disturb (DND)  
feature. The Log-In/Log-Out button can be assigned to a flexible button in the Proprietary  
Telephone Settings. The lighting patterns of the Log-In/Log-Out button on a proprietary  
telephone and status are as follows.  
Log-In  
Off: Log-In mode  
Red: Log-Out mode  
• There should be at least one extension that is in the  
Log-In mode in a group.  
!
☞
Log-Out  
• Related Feature References  
UCD Group  
Direct Inward System Access (DISA),  
Hunting Group  
DISA Ring Group  
Extension Group,  
Extension Hunting, Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)  
• Operating Instructions References  
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone”,  
Log-In/Log-Out Button  
1.7 Useful Features, “Joining or Leaving a Call Distribution Group (Log-In/Log-Out)”  
3-44  
Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
M
Message Waiting  
Allows an extension user to notify the called extension of a message waiting when the called  
extension is busy or does not answer the call. Only a proprietary telephone user with a  
MESSAGE button can know there is a message waiting if the LED on the MESSAGE button  
lights red. Pressing the lit MESSAGE button will reply to the message by calling the  
extension which left the message. The messages which are stored in the mailbox of the  
Voice Processing System can also be heard by following the Voice Mail prompts after  
pressing the lit MESSAGE button (Voice Mail Integration).  
• Cancelling the message can be performed from the extension sending it or from the  
extension receiving it.  
• Each extension can have a maximum of 8 simultaneous messages.  
• Messages are always left at the original extension. They cannot be sent to a Call  
Forwarding or Extension Hunting destination.  
!
• Operating Instructions References  
☞
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone”,  
Restoring the MESSAGE button  
1.7 Useful Features, “Leaving a Message Notification (Message Waiting)”  
1.7 Useful Features, “Voice Mail Integration for KX-TVP100”  
Microphone Mute  
Allows a proprietary telephone user to turn off the microphone for privacy.  
• The user’s voice will only be muted during a handsfree conversation. The user can hear  
the other party’s voice during Microphone Mute.  
!
• Operating Instructions Reference  
☞
1.5 During a Conversation, “Turning off the Microphone (Microphone Mute)”  
Features  
3-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
M-O  
Music on Hold / Background Music (BGM)  
While an external party is on hold, music is automatically generated.  
• Operations such as Call Hold and Call Transfer activate Music on Hold.  
• A user-supplied external music source, such as a radio, must be connected to the system  
when “External” is selected in program [111]. One external music source can be  
connected to the system. The music source is used for Music on Hold and/or BGM.  
• When “Tone” is selected in program [111], the cyclic tone is used only for Music on  
Hold and the external music source is used for BGM.  
!
• Connection Reference  
☞
2.10 External Music Connection  
• Required System Programming  
[111] Hold Music Selection  
• Related Feature References  
Hold, Call Transfer – to Exchange line, Call Transfer – to Extension,  
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)  
• Operating Instructions Reference  
1.7 Useful Features, “Turning on the Background Music (BGM)”  
One-Touch Dialling  
Allows a proprietary telephone user one-touch access to a desired party or system feature.  
This is done by storing an extension number, telephone number or a feature number (up to  
24 digits) in a One-Touch Dialling button. One-Touch Dialling buttons can be assigned to  
flexible buttons in the Proprietary Telephone Settings.  
• An account code can be stored into a One-Touch Dialling button.  
• A number consisting of 25 digits or more can be stored by dividing it and storing it in  
2 One-Touch Dialling buttons.  
!
• Operating Instructions References  
☞
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone”  
One-Touch Dialling button  
1.3 Making Calls, “Dialling by Simply Pressing a Button (One-Touch Dialling)”  
1.9 DSS Console Features, “Initial Settings”  
1.9 DSS Console Features, “One-Touch Dialling”  
1.9 DSS Console Features, “One-Touch Access for System Features”  
3-46  
Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
O
Operator / Manager Extension  
The system supports one operator. Any extension can be designated as an operator in  
program [008]. Extension port 01 is the system manager extension. The extension assigned  
as an operator or manager has the ability to perform the following operations.  
• Setting the Date and Time  
• Cancelling the Electronic Extension Lockout  
• Setting/Cancelling the Remote Extension Lock  
• Setting/Cancelling/Confirming the Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call) Remotely  
• Recording and Playing the Outgoing Message  
• Changing the Day/Night/Lunch Mode  
The manager extension can also perform System Programming and the following operation.  
• Setting the Extension Password  
• Required System Programming  
☞
[008] Operator Assignment  
• Operating Instructions Reference  
1.8 Operator / Manager Service Features  
Operator Call  
Allows an extension user to call an operator within the system by dialling the feature number  
assigned in program [121]. One extension can be assigned as the operator in program [008].  
• If an operator is not assigned, this feature is not available and a reorder tone will be  
heard.  
• Every extension user can reach the operator just by dialling the operator call number (0 or  
9) assigned in program [121] “Automatic Exchange Line Access Number Selection”.  
!
• Required System Programming  
☞
[008] Operator Assignment  
[121] Automatic Exchange Line Access Number Selection  
• Related Feature Reference  
Automatic Exchange Line Access Number  
• Operating Instructions Reference  
1.3 Making Calls, “Calling an Operator (Operator Call)”  
Features  
3-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
O
Outgoing Message (OGM)  
Allows the extension assigned as an operator or manager to record up to 2 outgoing voice  
messages (maximum 30 seconds each). This message is played when a caller accesses the  
DISA or UCD feature. An optional OGM/FAX Detection Card is required to program the  
OGM.  
The following are some examples of OGM and flow chart.  
Case 1: Receives 2 calls at a time – OGM for DISA.  
(Do not want customers to be kept waiting.)  
System  
DISA with  
OGM1  
OGM2  
OGM  
Outside Call  
To the designated destination  
DISA with  
OGM  
Outside Call  
To the designated destination  
OGM1: “This is A company. For the sales division, press 1. For the service  
division, press 2. To call the operator, press 0.”  
OGM2: Same as OGM 1  
Required Settings: [502] “MODE1”  
[414]-[416] “DISA1”  
Case 2: Uses the OGM in the day, night and lunch modes – OGM for DISA.  
System  
(In the day mode)  
DISA with  
OGM  
OGM1  
OGM2  
Outside Call  
To the designated destination  
System  
(In the night mode)  
DISA with  
OGM  
The call is disconnected by assigning  
“Disconnect” for DISA2 in program  
[510] “DISA No Dial Mode”.  
Outside Call  
OGM1: “This is A company. For the sales division, press 1. For the service  
division, press 2. To call the operator, press 0.”  
OGM2: “We are sorry but our office is closed for the day.”  
Required Settings: [502] “MODE2”  
[414]-[416] “DISA1” for OGM1, “DISA2” for OGM2  
3-48  
Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
O
Case 3: Uses a different OGM for exchange lines – OGM for DISA.  
System  
(Exchange line 1)  
Outside Call  
DISA with  
OGM  
OGM1  
OGM2  
To the designated destination  
To the designated destination  
(Exchange line 2)  
Outside Call  
DISA with  
OGM  
OGM1: “This is A company. For the sales division, press 1. For the service  
division, press 2. To call the operator, press 0.”  
OGM2: “This is B company. To contact Mr. A, press 101. To contact Mr. B, press  
102.”  
Required Settings: [502] “MODE2”  
[414]-[416] “DISA1” for the A company exchange line(s).  
“DISA2” for the B company exchange line(s).  
Case 4: Uses a different OGM when the line is busy – OGM for DISA.  
System  
DISA with  
OGM1  
OGM  
To the designated destination  
Outside Call  
DISA with  
OGM  
The line is busy.  
(If the operator is selected.)  
To the Operator  
OGM2  
OGM1: “This is A company. For the sales division, press 1. For the service  
division, press 2. To call the operator, press 0.”  
OGM2: “We are sorry. The line is currently busy. If you want to call the operator,  
press 0.”  
Required Settings: [502] “MODE2”  
[414]-[416] “DISA1”  
[506] “DISA2”  
Case 5: Distributes calls to the UCD group – OGM for UCD.  
System  
UCD with  
The line is busy.  
OGM  
(When the line is free.)  
Outside Call  
OGM1  
UCD with  
OGM  
To the UCD group  
The line is busy.  
(When the line is free.)  
Outside Call  
OGM2  
OGM1: “We are sorry. The line is currently busy. Please hold.”  
OGM2: Same as OGM1  
Required Settings: [502] “MODE3”  
[414]-[416] “UCD”  
Features  
3-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
O
Case 6: Disconnects a call after the OGM – OGM for UCD.  
System  
UCD with  
OGM1  
OGM  
The line is busy.  
Outside Call  
OGM2  
The call is disconnected.  
OGM1: “We are sorry. The line is currently busy. Please hold.”  
OGM2: “We are sorry. The line is currently busy. Please call back later.”  
Required Settings: [502] “MODE4”  
[414]-[416] “UCD”  
Case 7: Uses the DISA or UCD feature for exchange lines  
– OGM for DISA and UCD.  
System  
(UCD)  
UCD with  
OGM  
The line is busy.  
(When the line is free.)  
Outside Call  
To the UCD group  
OGM1  
(DISA)  
DISA with  
OGM  
OGM2  
Outside Call  
To the designated destination  
OGM1: “We are sorry. The line is currently busy Please hold.” (UCD message)  
OGM2: “This is A company. For the sales division, press 1. For the service  
division, press 2. To call the operator, press 0.” (DISA message)  
Required Settings: [502] “MODE5”  
[414]-[416] “DISA1” for exchange line(s) which use the DISA  
feature  
“UCD” for exchange line(s) which use the UCD  
feature  
Case 8: Uses the DISA feature when none of the extension in the UCD group can  
answer a call – OGM for UCD.  
System  
UCD with  
OGM1  
OGM  
The line is busy.  
Outside Call  
OGM2  
The call is sent to the DISA feature.  
OGM1: “We are sorry. The line is currently busy Please hold.”  
OGM2: “This is A company. For the sales division, press 1. For the service  
division, press 2. To call the operator, press 0.”  
Required Settings: [502] “MODE6”  
[414]-[416] “UCD”  
[523] “Intercept”  
3-50  
Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
O
• An optional OGM/FAX Detection Card is required to program the OGM.  
!
☞
• Connection Reference  
2.15 OGM/FAX Detection Card Installation  
• Required System Programming  
[414]–[416] Exchange Line Mode — Day/Night/Lunch  
[502] OGM Mode Selection  
[506] DISA Busy Mode  
[523] UCD Busy Mode  
• Related Feature References  
Direct Inward System Access (DISA), Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)  
• Operating Instructions Reference  
1.8 Operator / Manager Service Features, “Outgoing Message (OGM)”  
Features  
3-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
O
Outside Calling  
Allows an extension user to make a call to an external party by using one of the following  
line access methods.  
<Automatic Line Access>  
Allows an extension user to select an available exchange line automatically from the  
assigned lines in program [419] by pressing the Automatic Line Access number (0 or 9). For  
a proprietary telephone, a Line Access Key assignment (S-CO, G-CO, O-CO) in the  
Proprietary Telephone Settings is required. If Idle Line Preference is set on the telephone in  
the Proprietary Telephone Settings, the user can access an idle line only by going off-hook.  
<Individual Line Access>  
Allows a proprietary telephone user to select the desired exchange line by pressing the line  
key assigned as the S-CO key. A Line Access Key assignment (S-CO) is required before  
use.  
<Trunk Group Access>  
Allows an extension user to select an idle line within a designated trunk group. A trunk  
group is assigned in program [404]. To specify a trunk group, dial the feature number “8”  
and the desired trunk group number (1 through 6). A proprietary telephone user can also  
specify a trunk group by pressing a G-CO key. A Line Access Key assignment (G-CO) is  
required before use. If Idle Line Preference is set on the telephone in the Proprietary  
Telephone Settings, the user can access an idle line only by going off-hook.  
• Each extension requires System Programming to access exchange lines.  
• After an exchange line is seized, the system waits for the assigned time in program [206]  
before dialling.  
!
• Required System Programming  
☞
[206] Dialling Start Time  
[400] Exchange Line Connection Assignment  
[404] Trunk Group Assignment  
[405]–[407] Flexible Outward Dialling Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch  
[419] Automatic Designated Exchange Line Access  
• Related Feature References  
Automatic Exchange Line Access Number  
Preferred Line Assignment — Outgoing, Line Access Keys  
• Operating Instructions References  
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising Your Telephone Functions”,  
Preferred Line Assignment — Outgoing  
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone”,  
Line Access Keys  
1.3 Making Calls, “Outside Calling”  
3-52  
Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
P
Paging  
Allows an extension user to make a voice announcement to several people at the same time.  
The message is announced over the built-in speakers of proprietary telephones and/or the  
external pager. The paged person can answer the page (Answering a Page) from any  
extension within the system. The following types are available.  
All Extensions:  
Makes a voice announcement to all extensions over the built-in  
speakers of proprietary telephones.  
Group:  
Makes a voice announcement to the designated extension group over  
the built-in speakers of proprietary telephones. An extension group is  
assigned in program [600] “Extension Group Assignment”.  
Makes a voice announcement over the external pager.  
External:  
All Extensions & : Makes a voice announcement to all extensions over the built-in  
External  
speakers of proprietary telephones and the external pager.  
• An extension user can also transfer a call after paging (Paging and Transfer). Also, pages  
can be denied (Paging Deny).  
• An external pager (user-supplied) must be connected beforehand. One external pager can  
be connected to the system.  
!
• A confirmation tone is sent to the extensions before the voice announcement or  
answering.  
• A confirmation tone is sent to the external pager before the voice announcement. The  
tone to the external pager can be disabled in program [106].  
• An extension which has set the Do Not Disturb (DND) or Paging Deny feature, or is in  
use cannot be paged.  
• Connection Reference  
☞
2.9 External Pager (Paging Equipment) Connection  
• Required System Programming  
[106] External Paging Access Tone  
• Related Feature References  
Extension Group, Do Not Disturb (DND)  
• Operating Instructions Reference  
1.5 During a Conversation, “Paging”  
Features  
3-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
P
Parallelled Telephone Connection  
Any analogue proprietary telephone can be connected in parallel with a single line device,  
such as a single line telephone, facsimile and data terminal.  
• System Programming is required.  
!
• Connection Reference  
☞
2.11 Parallelled Telephone Connection  
• Required System Programming  
[610] Parallelled Telephone Connection  
• Related Feature Reference  
Power Failure Transfer  
• Operating Instructions Reference  
1.7 Useful Features, “Parallel Connection of a Proprietary Telephone and Single Line  
Telephone (Parallelled Telephone Connection)”  
Personal Speed Dialling  
Allows an extension user to store up to 10 speed dialling numbers (0 through 9) with a  
maximum of 24 digits per number. An extension number, telephone number or feature  
number can be stored. For example, storing extension numbers for each room in a house can  
be useful. (1 = Living Room, 2 = Kitchen, etc.) To make a call, dial # and the number.  
• Proprietary telephone users cannot use this feature if One-Touch Dialling buttons are  
assigned to PF buttons. If the user assign a personal speed dialling number, the number  
stored in the One-Touch Dialling button will be overwritten and vice versa. PF Buttons  
F1 through F10 correspond to the speed dialling numbers as follows.  
!
F1 — 0  
F2 — 1  
F3 — 2  
F4 — 3  
F5 — 4  
F6 — 5  
F7 — 6  
F8 — 7  
F9 — 8  
F10 — 9  
• A rotary telephone user cannot use this feature.  
• Operating Instructions References  
☞
1.3 Making Call, “Dialling with Personal Speed Dialling (Personal Speed Dialling)”  
3-54  
Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
P
Pickup Dialling  
Allows a single line telephone user to make an outgoing call by going off-hook, if the user  
has stored the telephone number (up to 32 digits) beforehand. This feature is also known as  
Hot Line.  
• A rotary telephone cannot program this feature.  
• The user can set and cancel this feature.  
!
• If the feature is activated and the user goes off-hook, a dial tone will be generated for the  
delay time assigned in program [203] and then dialling will start. During the delay time,  
the user can dial another party overriding the Pickup Dialling function.  
• Required System Programming  
☞
[203] Pickup Dial Delay Time  
• Operating Instructions Reference  
1.3 Making Call, “Dialling by Simply Going Off-Hook (Pickup Dialling)”  
Polarity Reverse Detection  
The circuit in the system can detect an exchange line polarity reverse signal from the Local  
Exchange when trying to make an outside call. This detects the start (a called party goes  
off-hook) and end (the called party goes on-hook) of an outgoing outside call. The  
conversation time can be verified on the SMDR printout using this feature.  
When an outside call is received, the circuit can also detect the polarity reverse signal before  
ringing.  
• Required System Programming  
☞
[424] Reverse (Polarity) Circuit Assignment  
• Related Feature Reference  
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)  
Features  
3-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
P
Power Failure Transfer  
During a power failure, specific extension telephones are automatically connected to specific  
exchange lines. This provides exchange line conversations between the following extensions  
and exchange lines.  
Exchange line 1 : extension port 01  
Exchange line 4 : extension port 09  
A single line telephone (SLT) can work in case of a power failure. Connect an SLT to the  
above extension port. For more information, refer to the Operating Instructions.  
• All other conversations, except the above combinations, are disconnected during a power  
failure.  
• Only an exchange line can have a conversation. All other features do not work.  
• We recommend connecting a single line telephone (SLT) in parallel at extension ports 01  
and 09, so that an SLT can be used during a power failure.  
!
• Connection Reference  
2.18 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer  
• Related Feature Reference  
☞
Parallelled Telephone Connection  
• Operating Instructions Reference  
1.7 Useful Features, “Power Failure Transfer”  
Preferred Line Assignment — Incoming  
A proprietary telephone user can select the method to answer incoming outside calls from  
the following 3 line preferences. System Programming and Proprietary Telephone Settings  
are required.  
No Line Preference:  
When an incoming call is received, the extension user must go  
off-hook and then press the flashing line key.  
Prime Line Preference: When incoming calls are received at the same time, the user  
can receive the call on the preferred exchange line by only  
going off-hook.  
Ringing Line Preference: When an incoming call is received, the user can receive the  
call ringing at their telephone by going off-hook.  
• A single line telephone can only set “Ringing Line Preference”.  
• Line access key(s) (Single Exchange Line, Other Exchange Line or Trunk Group) should  
be assigned to line key(s) beforehand.  
!
• Required System Programming  
☞
[408]–[410] Flexible Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch  
[411]–[413] Delayed Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch  
• Related Feature Reference  
Line Access Keys  
• Operating Instructions References  
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising Your Telephone Functions”,  
Preferred Line Assignment — Incoming  
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone”,  
Line Access Keys  
3-56  
Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
P
Preferred Line Assignment — Outgoing  
A proprietary telephone user can select a desired outgoing line preference to make outside  
calls from the following 3 line preferences. System Programming and Proprietary Telephone  
Settings are required.  
Idle Line Preference: When the user goes off-hook, they are connected to an idle line.  
An idle line is automatically selected from the pre-assigned  
lines in program [419].  
Prime Line Preference: When the user goes off-hook, they are connected to the  
pre-assigned line. Assign one prime line beforehand.  
No Line Preference:  
No line is selected when the user goes off-hook. They must  
select a line to make a call.  
• Line Access Key(s) (Single Exchange Line, Other Exchange Line or Trunk Group) should  
be assigned to the line key(s) beforehand.  
!
• Required System Programming  
☞
[400] Exchange Line Connection Assignment  
[405]–[407] Flexible Outward Dialling Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch  
[419] Automatic Designated Exchange Line Access  
• Related Feature Reference  
Line Access Keys  
• Operating Instructions References  
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising Your Telephone Functions”,  
Preferred Line Assignment — Outgoing  
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone”,  
Line Access Keys  
Proprietary Telephone Setting Data Default Set  
Allows a proprietary telephone user to reset the following Proprietary Telephone Settings to  
the default settings.  
• Preferred Line Assignment — Outgoing  
• Preferred Line Assignment — Incoming  
• Exchange Line Ringing Selection  
• Intercom Alert Assignment  
• Call Waiting Tone Selection  
• Operating Instructions Reference  
☞
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising Your Telephone Functions”,  
Proprietary Telephone Setting Data Default Set  
Features  
3-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
P-R  
Pulse to Tone Conversion  
Allows an extension user to change the dialling mode from Pulse to Tone after entering a  
telephone number to access services, such as computer telephone services or Voice Mail,  
which require tones.  
• This feature only works for exchange lines which have set “Pulse Mode” or ”Call  
Blocking Mode” in program [401].  
• Changing from Tone to Pulse is not possible.  
!
• Required System Programming  
☞
[401] Dial Mode  
• Operating Instructions Reference  
1.7 Useful Features, “Pulse to Tone Conversion”  
Recall  
The RECALL button is used to allow a proprietary telephone user to disconnect the current  
call and originate another call without hanging up. This is activated when “MODE2” is  
selected in program [110] and the RECALL button is pressed for longer than the time  
programmed in [418]. When “MODE1” is selected in program [110], the RECALL button  
can be used to access features of the Local Exchange or host PBX (External Feature Access).  
It is performed by putting the current party on hold and sending a recall signal while having  
an outside call.  
• Assigning the External Feature Access feature to any flexible button is useful when  
“MODE 2” was selected in program [110]. This can be done from any extension by  
assigning the RECALL button to a One-Touch Dialling button (☞ Operating Instructions,  
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone”,  
One-Touch Access for System Features). When the assigned button is pressed, a recall  
signal is sent during the programmed time in [418].  
!
• Required System Program Address  
[110] Recall Key Mode  
☞
[418] Recall Time  
• Operating Instructions Reference  
1.7 Useful Features, “External Feature Access”  
3-58  
Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
R
Recall Button on a Single Line Telephone  
Pressing the Recall button is used to allow a single line telephone user to hold a call for  
transferring or holding, if the recall time is within the assigned time in program [207]. The  
procedure to transfer a call or hold is determined in program [104] “Hold Mode Selection”.  
Pressing the Recall button can be also used to disconnect a call, if the recall time is more  
than the assigned time in program [207].  
• If “MODE 1” was selected in program [207], the system will recognise pressing the  
Recall button as hooking, while a busy tone or reorder tone is sent or during a  
conversation. The system will recognise as 1 being dialled in the pulse mode, while a  
dial tone is sent. The system can refuse receiving a pulse signal by selecting “Disable” in  
program [614]. Therefore, even if the Recall button is pressed during a dial tone, the  
system will regard it as hooking.  
!
• Required System Programming  
[207] Recall Timing Range Selection  
[614] Internal Pulse Detection  
☞
Receiving Calls  
Allows an extension user to receive an intercom or outside call by going off-hook. A  
proprietary telephone user can also receive a call by pressing the rapid flashing CO or  
INTERCOM button, and talk (handsfree mode) if the telephone has the SP-PHONE button.  
• A proprietary telephone user can select the Line Preference for incoming outside calls.  
See “Preferred Line Assignment — Incoming” in this section.  
!
• Required System Programming  
☞
[408]–[410] “Flexible Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch”  
[411]–[413] “Delayed Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch”  
• Related Feature Reference  
Preferred Line Assignment — Incoming  
• Operating Instructions Reference  
1.4 Receiving Calls, “Receiving Calls”  
Features  
3-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
R
Redial  
<Last Number Redial>  
Every extension automatically saves the last telephone number dialled so that the extension  
user can make a call to the same party later using a simple operation.  
<Saved Number Redial>  
Allows a proprietary telephone user to save the current external telephone number in the  
SAVE button during a conversation, so that the extension user can redial the same party later  
using a simple operation. The saved number can be redialled until another number is stored.  
A flexible button can be assigned as the SAVE button in the Proprietary Telephone Settings.  
• Operating Instructions References  
☞
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone”,  
SAVE button  
1.3 Making Calls, “Redialling the Last Number Dialled (Last Number Redial)”  
1.3 Making Calls, “Redialling the Saved Number (Saved Number Redial)”  
Ringing Pattern Selection  
A ringing pattern can be selected depending on the type of call such as an outside call,  
intercom call and doorphone call. Available ringing patterns are as follows:  
1 s  
Single:  
Double:  
Triple:  
S-Double:  
(Doorphone only)  
• Private calls can be distinguished from business calls by assigning different ringing per  
exchange line. Moreover, by assigning different ringing, intercom calls and doorphone  
calls can be distinguished from other calls. Therefore, careful attention should be applied  
to all ringing assignments.  
!
• Required System Programming  
☞
[115] Extension Ringing Pattern Selection  
[423] Exchange Line Ringing Pattern Selection  
[706] Doorphone Ringing/Tone Pattern Selection  
• Related Feature Reference  
Exchange Line Ringing Selection  
3-60  
Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
R
Room Monitor  
Allows a proprietary telephone or single line telephone with a MUTE button to monitor a  
room or the front door through another proprietary telephone or doorphone without them  
knowing. The access tone will not be sent to the monitored proprietary telephone when  
monitoring starts.  
• The extensions that can be monitored must be programmed in [612] before operation is  
possible.  
• If a doorphone is used as a room monitor, the access tone will be heard when monitoring  
starts as the default setting. The tone can be disabled in program [707].  
• This feature is not available for KX-T7050.  
!
• A single line telephone with a MUTE button can be used for monitoring, but cannot be  
monitored.  
• Required System Programming  
[612] Room Monitor Assignment  
[707] Doorphone Access Tone Selection  
☞
• Related Feature Reference  
Doorphone Call  
• Operating Instructions Reference  
1.7 Useful Features, “Room Monitor”  
Features  
3-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
S
Secret Dialling  
Allows a proprietary telephone user to conceal all or part(s) of a System Speed Dialling  
number assigned in program [001] or One-Touch Dialling number assigned to a flexible  
button in the Proprietary Telephone Settings which would normally appear on the display.  
• When storing a number, press the INTERCOM button at the beginning and the end of the  
numbers to be concealed.  
• One or more parts of a telephone number can be concealed.  
• Printing out the concealed number on a SMDR can be assigned in program [803].  
!
• Required System Programming  
☞
[001] System Speed Dialling Entry  
[803] Secret Speed Dialling/One-Touch Dialling Printing  
• Related Feature References  
One-Touch Dialling, System Speed Dialling  
• Operating Instructions References  
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone”,  
One-Touch Dialling Button  
1.7 Useful Features, “Secret Dialling”  
Self-Extension Number Confirmation  
(KX-T7130 only)  
Allows a display proprietary telephone user to confirm their port and extension number using  
a simple operation.  
• Operating Instructions Reference  
☞
1.7 Useful Features, “Self-Extension Number Confirmation  
(KX-T7130 only)”  
3-62  
Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
S
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)  
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) automatically prints out detailed call information  
of outside calls. A printer connected to the Serial Interface (RS-232C) port can be used to  
print incoming and outgoing outside calls, as well as print a hard copy of System  
Programming. To print out the record of System Programming items that have been  
assigned, use program [804] “System Data Dump”. To print the call records, use program  
[802] “Incoming/ Outgoing Call Selection for Printing”, which prints out the following  
records.  
• A record of all outgoing outside calls or outgoing toll calls  
• A record of all incoming outside calls  
An example of a printed call record:  
Date  
Time  
Ext.  
CO  
Dial number  
Duration  
Code  
31/12/98 12:52PM 203  
31/12/98 12:53PM 203  
31/12/98 *12:54PM 201  
31/12/98 1:04PM 203  
31/12/98 1:04PM 202  
31/12/98 1:05PM 203  
31/12/98 1:06PM 203  
31/12/98 1:06PM 202  
31/12/98 1:07PM 203  
31/12/98 2:15PM 203  
31/12/98 2:26PM 203  
31/12/98 2:27PM 216  
31/12/98 3:25PM  
05  
02  
02  
06  
05  
01  
01  
02  
01  
01  
01  
05  
02  
12345678901234567890123456789012  
00:00'16  
00:01'43  
00:07'48  
00:00'06  
00:00'09  
00:00'08  
00:00'08  
00:00'17  
00:11'00  
00:11'00  
00:03'00  
00:13'55  
00:11'48  
. ...  
. ...  
. ...  
4536  
. ...  
. ...  
. ...  
. ...  
.. 13  
. 201  
. ...  
. ...  
. ...  
<
<
incoming  
incoming  
>
>
092. . . 1438  
<
<
DISA incoming  
DISA incoming  
>
>
092123456789  
0921234567  
0921234567  
0921234567  
F/0927654321  
9=0924567123  
<
UCD Waiting  
>
Example of the SMDR printout format:  
Explanation  
(1) Date : shows the date of the call as Day/Month/Year.  
(2) Time : shows the time the call was started as Hour: Minute/AM or PM.  
“ ” indicates a transferred call.  
*
(3) Ext. : shows the extension number, etc. that engaged in the call.  
(4) CO : shows the exchange line number used for the call.  
(5) Dial number  
Outgoing call:  
Shows the called party’s telephone number (maximum 32 digits).  
Valid digits are 0 through 9, #,  
was pressed).  
and P (if the PAUSE button  
Received call:  
Shows <incoming>. An incoming call via the DISA feature is  
shown as <DISA incoming>, via the DIL feature is shown as  
<DIL incoming>.  
UCD waiting call: Shows <UCD waiting> for an incoming call via the UCD feature.  
When the “UCD waiting call” is answered, it becomes a  
“Received call” and a new record is started.  
Features  
3-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
S
(6) Duration : shows the duration of the call or the UCD call waiting time in  
Hours/Minutes/Seconds.  
(7) Code: shows the account code appended to the call, account code index number  
(e.g.: 13) or the extension number which uses the Walking COS feature  
(e.g.: 201).  
• This system can store information of up to 64 calls.  
• This data is not deleted even when the system is reset.  
!
• If RECALL is manually sent out during a conversation to make another call without  
hanging up, etc., a call record will be printed and a new record started. “F/” will be  
printed at the beginning of the dial number on the new record.  
• When a host PBX code is entered, “=” will be printed between the code and dialled  
number.  
• The language used for an SMDR printout can be selected in program [806].  
• Connection Reference  
☞
2.13 Printer and PC Connection  
• Required System Programming  
[000] Date and Time Setting  
[204] Call Duration Count Start Time  
[800] SMDR RS-232C Communication Parameters  
[801] SMDR Parameter  
[802] Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for Printing  
[803] Secret Speed Dialling/One-Touch Dialling Printing  
[804] System Data Dump  
[805] SMDR Account Code Selection  
[806] SMDR Language Assignment  
• Related Feature Reference  
Language Selection  
System Data Default Set  
This system can re-initialise the system-programmed data. If all the programmed data is  
cleared, the system will reset using the default settings by program [999].  
• The default setting for each programming item is listed in Section 5.1, Default Values.  
!
• Required System Programming  
☞
[999] System Data Clear  
• Installation Reference  
2.23 System Data Clear  
3-64  
Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
S-T  
System Speed Dialling  
The system supports 100 System Speed Dial numbers (up to 32 digits) assigned in program  
[001] that are available to all extension users. A System Speed Dial number is dialled out  
using a simple operation.  
Each System Speed Dial number can be assigned a name in program [011]. The assigned  
name will be displayed when making a call by using the System Speed Dialling feature. It  
will also be displayed when an external caller’s telephone number matches one of System  
Speed Dialling numbers and the Telephone Company does not provide the caller’s name.  
• Call Barring for System Speed Dialling can be assigned by program [301].  
• A rotary telephone user cannot use this feature.  
!
• Required System Programming  
☞
[001] System Speed Dialling Entry  
[011] System Speed Dialling Name Setting  
[301] Call Barring – System Speed Dialling Boundary Class  
• Related Feature  
Call Barring for System Speed Dialling  
• Operating Instructions for the Caller ID Card References  
Section 1.2, System Features  
Caller ID  
• Operating Instructions Reference  
1.3 Making Calls, “Dialling with System Speed Dialling (System Speed Dialling)”  
Timed Reminder  
<Timed Reminder>  
Allows an extension user to generate an alarm tone at a preset time as a wake-up alarm or a  
reminder. The user can set this to be activated once or everyday.  
<Timed Reminder, Remote (Wake-Up Call)>  
The operator or manager can remotely set, cancel and  
confirm the Timed Reminder of the desired extension.  
For example, this is useful for a small hotel or motel to  
set an extension in a guest room as a wake-up call, or  
set an extension in a child’s room by a mother.  
• Operating Instructions References  
☞
1.7 Useful Features, “Alarm Setting (Timed  
Reminder)”  
1.8 Operator / Manager Service Features, “Timed Reminder, Remote (Wake-Up Call)”  
Features  
3-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
T
Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service  
The system supports the day, night and lunch operation modes. The system operation for  
making and receiving calls can be different for the day, night and lunch modes. The system  
operation for call barring can be arranged to prevent unauthorised toll calls for each mode.  
Time service can be set automatically or manually by program [006].  
Changing the Day/Night/Lunch Modes  
The day, night and lunch modes can be changed either automatically at an assigned time in  
program [007] or manually by the operator or manager at any desired time.  
• The lunch mode interrupts the day or night mode. After the lunch mode is finished, the day  
or night mode starts again.  
• If the lunch mode is set using feature number “783#” in the automatic mode, the mode  
can only be cancelled by using feature number “780#”. This can be useful during  
holidays. The day and night modes are automatically changed at the programmed time in  
[007] even if feature number “780#” is not entered. These operations can only be done  
by an operator or manager.  
!
• The operator and manager can see the status of the mode (day, night or lunch) by the pre-  
assigned DSS buttons’ LED on the DSS console. Time service can be changed easily by  
pressing the pre-assigned DSS buttons.  
• The following programming items will be affected by the time service.  
[405]-[407] Flexible Outward Dialling Assignment  
— Day/Night/Lunch  
[408]-[410] Flexible Ringing Assignment  
— Day/Night/Lunch  
[411]-[413] Delayed Ringing Assignment  
— Day/Night/Lunch  
[414]-[416] Exchange Line Mode — Day/Night/Lunch  
[601]-[603] Call Barring – Class of Service Assignment  
— Day/Night/Lunch  
[700]-[702] Doorphone Ringing Assignment  
— Day/Night/Lunch  
[703]-[705] Door Opener Assignment  
— Day/Night/Lunch  
• Required System Programming  
☞
[006] Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Changing Mode  
[007] Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Start Time  
• Operating Instructions References  
1.8 Operator / Manager Service Features, “Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Setting”  
1.9 DSS Console Features, “Initial Settings”, Day, Night and Lunch Buttons  
Assignment  
3-66  
Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
U
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)  
Distributes incoming calls to one specific extension group called a UCD group assigned in  
program [520]. Calls to the UCD group hunt for an idle extension in numerical order. The  
UCD feature is particularly helpful when a certain extension receives a high volume of calls  
compared with other extensions.  
• An optional OGM/FAX Detection Card is required to perform the UCD feature.  
• The Log-In or Log-Out status can be set on an extension basis. There should be at least  
one extension that is in Log -In status in the UCD group.  
• An extension which sets the Call Forwarding–All, –Busy or No Answer, or the Do Not  
Disturb (DND) feature is skipped during circular calling.  
!
• When all extensions in the UCD group are busy, a busy message is heard and then Music  
on Hold is activated. If any extension in the UCD group is not available within the  
programmed time period, then (1) an OGM will be heard and the call is disconnected, or  
(2) the call will be sent to pre-programmed extension(s) in [408]-[410]. System  
Programming is required for this operation. Refer to the  
and results for UCD calls”.  
“Flow chart of possible cases  
• Connection Reference  
☞
2.15 OGM/FAX Detection Card Installation  
• Required System Programming  
[111] Hold Music Selection  
[408]-[410] Flexible Ringing Assignment – Day/Night/Lunch  
[414]–[416] Exchange Line Mode — Day/Night/Lunch  
[502] OGM Mode Selection  
[513] Cyclic Tone Detection  
[520] UCD Group  
[521] UCD Busy Waiting Time  
[522] UCD OGM Message Interval Time  
[523] UCD Busy Mode  
[524] UCD Intercept Mode  
[525] UCD Ringing Time before Intercept  
[526] UCD Ringing Time after Intercept  
[600] Extension Group Assignment  
• Related Feature References  
Call Forwarding, Do Not Disturb (DND), Extension Group, Log-In/Log-Out  
Features  
3-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
U
Outline of a UCD  
(1) When a number of calls have arrived  
(2) When the first call arrives at extension  
A, the second call arrives at extension B.  
at the UCD group, the first call arrives at  
extension A first.  
Calls have arrived at the UCD group.  
3rd call in queue  
2nd call in queue  
3rd call in queue  
2nd call in queue  
1st call in queue  
UCD group  
Extension B  
(When extension B is  
busy or Log-Out has  
been set at extension B,  
the call arrives at exten-  
sion C.)  
UCD group  
Extension A  
(When extension A is  
busy or Log-Out has  
been set at extension A,  
the call arrives at exten-  
sion B.)  
Extension C  
-
Extension A  
Extension B  
(When extension B is  
busy or Log-Out has  
been set at extension B,  
the call arrives at exten-  
sion C.)  
(3) When the second call arrives at  
extension B, the third call will arrive at  
extension C.  
Extension C  
(When extension C is  
busy or Log-Out has  
been set at extension C,  
the call arrives at exten-  
sion A.)  
3-68  
Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
U
Flow chart of possible cases and results for UCD calls  
An outside line call is made.  
The caller reaches the UCD group.  
Busy  
Call  
A
B
*1  
OGM  
Answered.  
The call is not  
answered.  
*2  
*4  
Music on Hold is heard.  
*9  
Is Intercept Routing employed?  
Busy  
Call  
*3  
Yes  
Goes to  
Yes  
B
Has the UCD Busy  
Waiting Time expired?  
No  
C
*10  
Disconnect.  
No  
The call is sent to  
another extension.  
*6  
*5  
What is the  
OGM Mode?  
Goes to  
A
*11  
MODE3 or MODE5  
MODE4  
MODE6  
Answered.  
The call is not  
answered.  
*7  
*8  
Is Intercept Routing  
employed?  
Is Intercept Routing  
employed?  
The other  
OGM is heard.  
*10  
Disconnect.  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Disconnect.  
Disconnect.  
Goes to  
C
Busy tone  
The other  
OGM is heard.  
Disconnect.  
Goes to DISA  
Note: The explanation for *1 through *11 is on the next page.  
Features  
3-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
U
*1: An OGM is sent to the caller.  
When the system detects a cyclic tone or CPC signal while the OGM is being sent, the call is  
disconnected.  
*2: Music on hold is selected in program [111] as follows.  
• External – Uses an external music source, such as a radio.  
• Tone – Uses the cyclic tone equipped with the system.  
*3: When an extension in the UCD group is available.  
*4: The system holds the call until the assigned time in program [521] expires.  
*5: OGM repeats the assigned time intervals in program [522] within the assigned time in program  
[521].  
*6: The OGM Mode is selected in program [502].  
*7: The system treats the call according to program [523] as follows when the assigned time in [521]  
expires.  
• Disconnect – The call is disconnected.  
• Intercept – The call is sent to the extensions programmed in [408]-[410].  
*8: The system treats the call according to program [523] as follows when the assigned time in [521]  
expires.  
• Disconnect – The call is disconnected.  
• Intercept – The other OGM leads the caller to the DISA feature (☞ “Direct Inward System  
Access (DISA)” in this section).  
*9: The system treats the call according to program [524] as follows when the assigned time in [525]  
expires.  
• Disconnect – The call is disconnected.  
• Intercept – The call is sent to the extensions programmed in [408]-[410].  
*10: If the caller did not hear an OGM, the call will not be disconnected until the caller goes on-hook.  
*11: The UCD Ring Timer after Intercept starts. The destination telephone(s) will ring for the time  
programmed in program [526]. If the call is not answered during the programmed time, the call  
will be disconnected.  
3-70  
Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
V
Voice Mail Integration for KX-TVP100  
This system supports Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) equipment (KX-TVP100)  
by sending DTMF tones described in program [103]. The DTMF tones sent to a VPS  
indicate the state of a call (busy, answered, ringing, disconnected, etc.). The DTMF tones  
also inform a VPS of the destination of a call transferred to the VPS by the Call Forwarding  
or DISA Intercept Routing – No Answer feature. Up to 4 VPSs can be connected to the  
extension ports as extensions in the system.  
System Explanation  
1. Voice Mail Service  
1.1 Call Forwarding to VM  
If an extension user sets Call Forwarding (C. FWD) whose destination is the VPS, an  
incoming call is forwarded to the VPS. The system sends the VPS the extension mailbox  
number at that time. Therefore, the calling party can leave their message in the mailbox  
of the desired extension without having to know the mailbox number.  
Outside Call  
DIL, DISA  
System  
Intercom  
Call  
KX-TVP100  
C.FWD  
Port 1  
Port 2  
Port 3  
Extension  
VM Hunting  
Chain  
Port 4  
Outside Call  
DIL, DISA  
System  
KX-TVP100  
C.FWD  
Port 1  
Port 4  
Port 2  
Port 3  
Operator  
Extension  
Transfer  
VM Hunting  
Chain  
Features  
3-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
V
1.2 DISA Intercept to VM  
If the VPS is set as the Intercept destination of an exchange line, an outside call is  
forwarded to the VPS. The system sends the VPS the extension mailbox number at that  
time. Therefore, the calling party can leave their message in the mailbox of the desired  
extension without having to know the mailbox number. If a DISA call is transferred to  
the VPS by Intercept Routing from a DISA ring group, your system will transmit the  
mailbox number of the lowest port number of the DISA ring group. Delayed Ringing  
must be assigned to VPS extensions in programs [411]-[413].  
Outside Call  
DISA  
System  
KX-TVP100  
Intercept  
Extension  
Port 1  
Port 2  
Port 3  
Port 4  
1.3 Listening to a Recorded Message  
If the VPS receives a message, the VPS can turn on the MESSAGE button indicator on  
the corresponding proprietary telephone to notify to the user. The VPS notifies the  
extension user that there is a message waiting in their mailbox. When the MESSAGE  
button indicator is lit, pressing the button allows the extension user to play back the  
stored message. A single line telephone user hears dial tone 3 (☞ “Distinctive Dial  
Tones” in this section) when going off-hook if there are messages in their mailbox. They  
can call the voice mail extension to listen to their messages. In this case, they must listen  
to all of the messages. Once they access voice mail, dial tone 3 will be eliminated and not  
be heard next time they go off-hook. Therefore, they will not know even if there are  
messages left.  
3-72  
Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
V
2. Automated Attendant (AA) Service  
2.1 AA to Extension  
AA receives and answers outside calls and offers services such as transferring to an  
extension or mailbox using DTMF signalling, which is sent from the calling party.  
Outside Call  
DIL, UCD  
System  
KX-TVP100  
Transfer  
AA 1  
AA 2  
AA 3  
Extension  
AA Hunting Chain  
or UCD Group  
AA 4  
• A VPS can be assigned as the destination for the following features.  
Call Forwarding – All Calls  
!
Call Forwarding – Busy/No Answer  
DISA Intercept Routing – No Answer  
In these functions, the caller does not need to know the mailbox number of the called  
extension because the code is automatically transmitted to the VPS.  
• The mailbox number is the same as its extension number.  
• The Voice Mail extension should set Data Line Security to prevent interference from  
system signals.  
• If KX-TA624 cannot be selected with the PBX type setup menu of the KX-TVP100,  
select “KX-T1232”. Follow the steps for a KX-T1232.  
☞
• Connection Reference  
2.8 Extension Connection  
• Required System Programming  
[009] Extension Number Assignment  
[102] Voice Mail Port for KX-TVP100  
[103] DTMF Integration for KX-TVP100  
[408]-[410] Flexible Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch  
[411]-[413] Delayed Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch  
[414]–[416] Exchange Line Mode — Day/Night/Lunch  
[507] DISA Intercept Mode  
• Related Feature References  
Call Forwarding, Data Line Security, Direct Inward System Access (DISA),  
Distinctive Dial Tones, Extension Hunting, Intercept Routing  
• Operating Instructions Reference  
1.7 Useful Features, “Voice Mail Integration for KX-TVP100”  
Features  
3-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Features  
V-W  
Volume Control  
Allows a proprietary telephone user to adjust the following volumes, as necessary, by  
adjusting the corresponding levers or pressing the corresponding buttons.  
• Handset receiver volume  
• Ringer volume  
• Speaker volume  
• Operating Instructions Reference  
☞
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Volume Control — Handset Receiver/  
Ringer/Speaker”  
Walking COS  
Allows an extension user who is not at their own telephone to override the call barring COS  
number of another extension by dialling their extension password. For the duration of the  
call, the COS of the extension is changed to the COS of their own extension.  
• If the extension overriding call barring is assigned to “Forced” or “Verify–All”, the user  
must enter the account code before the line access code.  
• When a user makes a call using this feature, the user’s extension number will be  
displayed on the SMDR, not the extension where the user made the call.  
!
• Operating Instructions References  
☞
1.7 Useful Features, “Calling Using Your Privileges at Another Extension  
(Walking COS)”  
1.8 Operator / Manager Service Features, “Extension Password Set (Manager only)”  
3-74  
Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 4  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1  
Before System Programming  
NOTE:  
System data clear should be performed before System Programming.  
(☞ 2.21, Starting the System for the First Time)  
Default Setting  
This system has factory default settings (☞ 5.1, Default Values). If any of the programming  
needs to be changed, you can change the setting by System Programming. Default shows  
you the factory default setting. Any required changes can be written in the Programming  
Tables listed in section 7, Programming Tables.  
Required Telephone Set  
The following display proprietary telephone is required for System Programming.  
• KX-T7130  
Connect the telephone to the following.  
• Port number 01  
Before entering the programming mode  
Before entering the programming mode, confirm that:  
• Your telephone is on-hook.  
• No calls are on hold at your telephone.  
Placing the Overlay on a Telephone  
A programming overlay is packed with the telephone at the factory. This overlay should be  
used at all times during programming. The functions of the telephone keys change during  
programming as shown below.  
Location of Controls with the Overlay  
SECRET  
, –  
CLEAR  
PAUSE  
STORE  
2
5
8
3
6
9
1
4
7
AUTO  
SELECT  
0
PREV  
FLASH  
END  
NEXT  
KX-T7130  
4-2  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1  
Before System Programming  
To enter the programming mode  
MEMORY  
system password  
#
SET  
PROGRAM  
Set to “PROGRAM” on  
the back of the telephone.  
Press #.  
Enter the system password.  
(default : 1234)  
• The system password can be changed by program [002] “System Password”.  
• During the programming mode, your extension is treated as a busy extension.  
• If you enter the wrong system password, you will hear an alarm tone (3 beeps). Try  
again.  
!
Programming sequence  
After entering the programming mode  
X
X
X
STORE  
parameters  
END  
Enter the Program Address. Enter the parameters. Press the  
Press the END  
STORE button. button.  
After pressing the STORE button, you will hear one of the following tones.  
Confirmation tone (1 beep):  
This informs you that storing is completed. You can  
continue programming by entering the same or another  
program address  
(2 beeps): This informs you that the same parameter has already been  
stored.  
Alarm tone (3 beeps):  
This informs you that the entry is invalid.  
To exit the programming mode  
MEMORY  
SET  
PROGRAM  
Set to “SET” on the back  
of the telephone.  
System Programming  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1  
Before System Programming  
Programming example  
The following programming instructions assume that you have already entered the  
programming mode.  
Example: Program [404] “Trunk Group Assignment”  
Program address  
Program title  
[404] Trunk Group Assignment  
Program  
description  
Assigns a maximum 6 trunk groups. Each exchange line must be assigned to an trunk  
group. For example, if there are multiple telephone service companies available, exchange  
lines can be grouped by company.  
or PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
STORE  
1
2
4
0
NEXT  
4
exchange line no.*  
trunk group no.*  
END  
(1···6)  
(1···6/  
)
To continue  
SELECT  
1
* Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)  
* Trunk (TRK) group number: 1 through 6  
Program sequence:  
1. Enter program address “404”.  
2. Press “NEXT”.  
2
Default  
Exchange line 1 through 6 – Trunk group 1 through 6  
3. Enter the exchange line number  
(1 through 6) or press to  
select all exchange lines.  
4. Enter the trunk group number  
(1 through 6).  
• Each exchange line can only belong to one trunk group.  
!
☞
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Outside Calling  
5. Press “STORE”.  
6. Press “END”.  
Additional information  
To continue assigning another  
exchange line number, press  
“SELECT” instead of “END”  
and repeat from step 3.  
You can also continue assigning  
by pressing “PREV” or  
“NEXT” instead of “END”.  
You can go to the previous or  
next exchange line and repeat  
from step 4.  
Provides the factory default setting. If you change the setting,  
write the programmed data in the programming table listed in  
section 7, Programming Tables.  
Additional Information  
• When you press , for example in step 3 in program [404], if all exchange lines have  
been assigned as trunk group 1, “CO : TRK GRP – 1” will be displayed. If each  
exchange line has been assigned to a different trunk group, “CO : Mixed” will be  
displayed.  
• You can press the SELECT button repeatedly to select the desired parameter, if available.  
• You can use the  
or  
button to move to the next/previous step, if available.  
4-4  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[000]-[001]  
[000] Date and Time Setting  
Sets the current date and time.  
day  
year  
y  
0
0
0
NEXT  
SELECT  
(00···99)  
(Jan.···Dec.)  
(1···31)  
hour  
minute  
SELECT  
END  
SELECT  
STORE  
(Sun···Sat)  
(1···12)  
(00···59)  
(AM/PM)  
Default  
’98 Jan. 1 Thu 12:00 AM  
• To return to the previous programming step, press  
.
!
• To correct a wrong entry for the year, day, hour or minute, press the CLEAR button and  
enter the new one in each step.  
• After changing an entry, you can press the STORE button. You do not have to perform  
the rest of the steps.  
• The clock starts immediately after the STORE button is pressed.  
• The system supports years from 1998 to 2097.  
• Feature References  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Date and Time Setting, Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)  
[001] System Speed Dialling Entry  
Assigns a maximum of 100 System Speed Dialling numbers. To delete a stored phone  
number, press the CLEAR and STORE buttons after entering the Speed Dialling number.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
phone no.  
speed dialling no.  
STORE  
END  
0
0
1
NEXT  
(00···99)  
32 digits max.  
(e.g. 0···9,  
)
To continue  
SELECT  
Default  
Not stored.  
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.  
!
• A line access number (9 or 0, 81 through 86) should be included before the phone  
number.  
System Programming  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[001]-[002]  
4.2  
System Programming  
• Up to 32 digits, consisting of “0 through 9”, “ ,”, “#”, “PAUSE”, “—”,“RECALL” and  
“ICM (Secret)”can be stored.  
• If you are storing an account code assigned in [310] “Account Codes”, enter  
account code after a line access number.  
and the  
• If you want to conceal all or part of a System Speed Dialling number on the display, enter  
“[” and “]” (press the ICM button) before and after the part you want to conceal. Do not  
press the ICM button before and after a line access number (9 or 0, 81 through 86) or an  
account code. “[” and “]” are counted as one digit.  
• Press  
or  
to scroll the display  
• Feature References  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Secret Dialling, System Speed Dialling  
[002] System Password  
Assigns the password required for entering the System Programming mode. Also it is used  
to set an extension password.  
password  
0
0
2
NEXT  
STORE  
END  
4 digits  
(0000···9999)  
Default  
1234  
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.  
!
☞
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Extension Password / System Password  
4-6  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[003]-[004]  
[003] DSS Console Port Assignment  
Assigns a maximum of 2 port numbers to connect the DSS console(s).  
DSS console no.  
NEXT  
extension port no.  
0
0
3
STORE  
END  
(1···2)  
(02···16)  
To continue  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
Default  
All DSS consoles – Disable (Not stored)  
• Two DSS consoles cannot be assigned to the same port number.  
!
• Extension port 01 is the manager extension. So please do not assign extension port 01 as  
the DSS console port.  
• To not assign an extension port number, press the CLEAR button in the extension port  
number step.  
• The extension port number which has already been assigned as a paired telephone in program  
[004] “Paired Telephone Assignment for DSS Console” is not available in this program.  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
DSS Console  
☞
[004] Paired Telephone Assignment for DSS Console  
Assigns a port number for an extension paired with the DSS console.  
DSS console no.  
NEXT  
extension port no.  
0
0
4
STORE  
END  
(1···2)  
(01···16)  
To continue  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
Default  
Extension port number paired with DSS console 1 – Disable (Not stored)  
Extension port number paired with DSS console 2 – Disable (Not stored)  
• A single line telephone (SLT) cannot be paired with the DSS console.  
• To not assign an extension port number, press the CLEAR button in the extension port  
number step.  
• The extension port number which has already been assigned as a DSS console in program  
[003] “DSS Console Port Assignment” is not available in this program.  
!
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
DSS Console  
☞
System Programming  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[005]-[006]  
4.2  
System Programming  
[005] One-Touch Transfer Using a DSS Button  
Selects how an outside call is transferred to any extension using the DSS button.  
With Transfer: Press the DSS button to transfer an outside call.  
Without Transfer: Press the TRANSFER button then the DSS button to transfer an  
outside call.  
0
0
5
NEXT  
SELECT  
STORE  
END  
(With Transfer/  
Without Transfer)  
Default  
With Transfer  
• This program is effective for 2 kinds of DSS buttons. One is on the DSS console, and the  
other is flexible line key on your proprietary telephone assigned as a DSS button.  
!
• Operating Instructions References  
☞
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone”,  
DSS (Direct Station Selection) Button  
1.9 DSS Console Features, “Initial Settings”, One-Touch Dialling Assignment  
[006] Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Changing Mode  
Selects changing the day, night and lunch service manually or automatically. For manual  
changing, refer to the Operating Instructions. For automatic changing, set the next program  
[007] “Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Start Time”.  
0
0
6
NEXT  
SELECT  
STORE  
END  
(Man/Auto)  
Default  
Manual  
• Feature Reference  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service  
4-8  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[007]-[008]  
[007] Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Start Time  
Sets the starting time on a week day basis, when “Automatic” is selected in program [006]  
“Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Changing Mode”.  
1
*
or  
0
0
or  
NEXT  
PREV  
7
NEXT  
SELECT  
(Every day)  
(Day/Night/  
(Sun···Sat)  
Lunch-S/Lunch-E)  
To go to another day of the week  
To go to another mode  
2
*
minute  
STORE  
END  
SELECT  
SELECT  
hour or  
(00···59)  
(AM/PM)  
(1···12)  
<If you press the SELECT button>  
1
* To assign every day of the week to one selection, press the  
button.  
2
* If the SELECT button is pressed, the display will show the previous entry. If the previous  
setting was “None”, press the SELECT button to enter the starting time. If you do not  
need to change the time service, keep pressing the SELECT button until “None” is  
displayed. For example, if Monday’s day mode is set to “None”, the day mode will not be  
turned on Monday.  
Default  
Everyday – Day – 9:00 AM / Night – 5:30 PM /  
Lunch-S (starting) – None / Lunch-E (ending) – None  
• Feature Reference  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service  
[008] Operator Assignment  
Assigns an extension port number for the operator.  
extension port no.  
0
0
NEXT  
8
STORE  
END  
(01···24)  
Default  
Jack-01  
• Feature References  
Section 3, Features  
☞
Operator / Manager Extension, Operator Call  
System Programming  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[009]  
4.2  
System Programming  
[009] Extension Number Assignment  
Selects an extension numbering plan, Plan 1, Plan 2 or Plan 3, and assigns an extension  
number to each extension.  
Plan 1: Available extension numbers are 200 through 299.  
Plan 2: Available extension numbers are 100 through 499.  
Plan 3: Available extension numbers are 10 through 49.  
0
0
NEXT  
SELECT  
STORE  
9
(Plan:1/2/3)  
NEXT or PREV  
To continue  
extension no.  
extension port no.  
NEXT  
STORE  
END  
(01···24)  
To continue  
SELECT  
Default  
Plan 1: extension ports 01 through 24 – extension numbers 201 through 224  
• If the selected extension numbering plan is the same as the previously stored one, 2 beeps  
will be heard.  
• If “Plan 2” or “Plan 3” is selected, the default extension numbers will change  
automatically as follows.  
!
Plan 2: extension ports 01 through 24 – extension numbers 201 through 224  
Plan 3: extension ports 01 through 24 – extension numbers 21 through 44  
• If “Plan 2” or “Plan 3” is selected, some feature numbers will also change. Refer to the  
attached leaflet for details.  
• A double entry of the extension number is invalid. If the programmed extension number  
is the same as a previously stored one, 2 beeps will be heard when the STORE button is  
pressed. When extension number 203 has already been assigned to port number 03, to  
assign extension number 203 to the port number 05, change the extension number of port  
number 03 to another one. Then assign extension number 203 to port number 05.  
• If a Voice Processing System (VPS) is connected to the system, select “Plan 1” or “Plan  
2” in this program and “Enable” in [103] “DTMF Integration”, so that the DTMF  
integration between VPS and the system can be enabled.  
• If a rotary telephone is used at any extension, select “Plan 1” in this program.  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Intercom Calling  
☞
4-10  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[010]  
[010] LCD Time Display Selection  
Selects how the current time and date will be displayed on a proprietary telephone while idle.  
Either 12 hour or 24 hour (military time) can be selected.  
0
1
0
NEXT  
SELECT  
STORE  
END  
(12/24 HOUR)  
Display example:  
When “12 HOUR” is selected: Jan 1 11:20PM  
When “24 HOUR” is selected: 1 Jan 23:20  
Default  
12 HOUR  
• Programs [000] “Date and Time Setting” and [007] “Time (Day/Night/ Lunch) Service  
Start Time”, and the Timed Reminder feature are assigned using 12-hour time regardless of  
this program. The SMDR printout is also printed using 12-hour time.  
!
System Programming  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[011]  
4.2  
System Programming  
[011] System Speed Dialling Name Setting  
Assigns a name to each System Speed Dialling number. The name will be displayed when  
making a call by using the System Speed Dialling feature. It will also be used for the Caller  
ID feature.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
STORE  
speed dialling no.  
name*  
NEXT  
END  
0
1
1
16 characters  
max.  
(00···99)  
To continue  
SELECT  
* Name:  
Combination Table  
Pressing SELECT  
(Times)  
Keys  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
Q
A
D
G
J
2
q
a
3
Z
B
E
H
K
N
R
U
X
,
4
z
5
!
6
?
c
f
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
b
e
C
F
I
d
g
j
h
k
n
r
i
L
O
S
V
Y
:
l
M
P
m
p
t
o
s
T
u
x
’
=
@
v
y
W
w
.
+
%
;
>
)
”
$
-
&
<
(
#
#
<Example>  
— To enter “Mike;  
1. Press 6 and then press the SELECT button once to enter “M”.  
2. Press 4 and then press the SELECT button 6 times to enter “i”.  
3. Press 5 and then press the SELECT button 4 times to enter “k”.  
4. Press 3 and then press the SELECT button 4 times to enter “e”.  
Default  
All System Speed Dialling numbers – Not stored.  
• To erase all letters, press the CLEAR button. To erase 1 letter, press  
• Each name has a maximum of 16 characters.  
.
!
• Press  
to scroll the display to the right side.  
• Feature References  
Section 3, Features  
☞
System Speed Dialling  
4-12  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[012]  
[012] Alternative Feature Numbering Plan  
Replaces any feature number with a code number 50 through 59. This is useful when  
selecting “Plan 2” or “Plan 3” in program [009] “Extension Number Assignment” as some  
feature numbers change for Plan 2 and Plan 3 and they might be difficult to remember.  
(Refer to the attached leaflet “Notice for the Feature Numbers”.) All extension users can  
dial these assigned codes instead of feature numbers.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
STORE  
Feature no.  
0
1
2
NEXT  
code no.  
END  
10 digits max.  
(0···9, , #)  
(50···59)  
To continue  
SELECT  
Default  
All codes – Not stored.  
• This is not possible when “Plan 1” has been selected in program [009].  
!
System Programming  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[100]-[101]  
4.2  
System Programming  
[100] Hunting Group Set  
Enables or disables automatically locating an idle extension in the same extension group as  
the dialled extension, when the called extension is busy. If “Enable” is selected, assign the  
next program [101] “Hunting Type”. Extension groups are defined in program [600]  
“Extension Group Assignment”.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
1
0
0
NEXT  
extension group no.*  
SELECT  
STORE  
END  
(1···8/  
)
(Enable/  
Disable)  
To continue  
SELECT  
* Extension group number: 1 through 8 / (all extension groups)  
Default All extension groups – Disable  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Extension Hunting  
☞
[101] Hunting Type  
Assigns the hunting type, Terminate or Circular, to each extension group when a hunting  
group is enabled in program [100] “Hunting Group Set”.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
extension group no.*  
END  
1
0
1
NEXT  
STORE  
SELECT  
(1···8/  
)
(Terminate/  
Circular)  
To continue  
SELECT  
* Extension group number: 1 through 8 / (all extension groups)  
Default All extension groups – Terminate  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Extension Hunting  
☞
4-14  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[102]  
[102] Voice Mail Port for KX-TVP100  
Assigns the extension port number(s) connected to a Panasonic Voice Processing System  
(VPS) equipment (KX-TVP100). Only extension ports 07, 08, 15 and 16 are available.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
STORE  
extension port no.*  
SELECT  
END  
1
0
NEXT  
2
(07,08,15,16/  
)
(Enable/  
Disable) To continue  
SELECT  
* Extension port number: 07, 08, 15 and/or 16 / (All 4 extension ports)  
Default All 4 extension ports – Disable  
• Feature Reference  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Voice Mail Integration for KX-TVP100  
System Programming  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[103]  
4.2  
System Programming  
[103] DTMF Integration for KX-TVP100  
Enables or disables the system to send codes (DTMF signals) to the extension(s) assigned as  
the Voice Mail Port in program [102] “Voice Mail Port”. These DTMF signals indicate the  
state of the call (busy, answered, ringing, disconnected, etc.) in addition to the normal call  
tones. They also enable the Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) equipment  
(KX-TVP100) to immediately recognise the current state of the call and speed up the call  
handling.  
STORE  
SELECT  
NEXT  
END  
3
0
1
(Enable/Disable)  
Default  
Disable  
• The table on next page describes the codes (DTMF signals), call state and conditions for  
the DTMF integration operation.  
• Select “Plan 1” or “Plan 2” in program [009] “Extension Number Assignment”, and select  
“Enable” in this program to enable the DTMF integration.  
!
• This feature greatly improves the performance of the Panasonic KX-TVP100: Voice  
Processing Systems which have been programmed for Inband Signalling. For more  
information about Inband Signalling, refer to your Voice Processing System manual.  
• Feature Reference  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Voice Mail Integration for KX-TVP100  
DTMF signals  
Code  
Call State  
Ringback Tone  
Busy Tone  
Conditions  
1
2
3
When an extension a VPS has dialled is ringing.  
When an extension a VPS has dialled is busy.  
Reorder Tone  
When a VPS dials an invalid extension number or when a VPS  
is accidentally connected to another Voice Mail Port.  
4
DND  
When an extension a VPS has dialled sets the DND (Do Not  
Disturb) feature.  
5
6
Answer  
When an extension which a VPS has dialled answers the call.  
When a called extension is forwarded to a VPS, the call can be  
Forwarded to  
Voice Processing forwarded to another available VPS. In this way, the first VPS,  
System  
(Ringing)  
typically an Auto-Attendant, can release the call to another  
VPS and receive another incoming call.  
7
8
Forwarded to  
Voice Mail (Busy) are available to receive the call.  
When a called extension is forwarded to a VPS and no VPSs  
Forwarded to  
Extension  
When a called extension is forwarded to another, non-VPS  
extension.  
9
Confirmation Tone When a VPS has successfully turned a message waiting lamp  
on or a message waiting lamp off.  
#9  
Disconnect  
When the calling party disconnects.  
4-16  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[104]-[105]  
[104] Hold Mode Selection  
You can select how to hold a line and transfer a call to another extension with a single line  
telephone (SLT), Hold-1, Hold-2 or Hold-3. If the following occurs frequently with an SLT,  
select “Hold-2” or “Hold-3”.  
• Nobody answers when a call is received.  
• A busy tone is heard even though nobody is using the exchange line.  
If a call is not terminated after going on-hook, the above cases occur. To avoid these  
problems, select “Hold-2” or “Hold-3”. Every call will be terminated unless 50 is dialled  
after pressing the Recall button in the Hold-2 and Hold-3 modes.  
Hold-1: To hold a line or transfer a call, press the Recall button.  
Hold-2: To hold a line, press the Recall button and dial 50. To transfer a call, press the  
Recall button.  
Hold-3: To hold a line or transfer a call, press the Recall button and dial 50.  
1
0
4
NEXT  
SELECT  
STORE  
END  
(Hold-1/Hold-2  
Hold-3)  
Default  
Hold-1  
• Feature Reference  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Hold  
[105] Conference Tone  
Enables or disables the confirmation tone before starting or ending a conference call  
established by the Conference feature or Executive Busy Override feature.  
1
0
5
NEXT  
SELECT  
STORE  
END  
(Enable/  
Disable)  
Default  
Enable  
• Feature References  
Section 3, Features  
☞
Conference (3-party), Conference (5-party), Executive Busy Override  
System Programming  
4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[106]-[108]  
4.2  
System Programming  
[106] External Paging Access Tone  
Enables or disables the splash tone before paging is sent over the external pager.  
6
1
0
NEXT  
SELECT  
STORE  
END  
(Enable/  
Disable)  
Default  
Enable  
• Feature Reference  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Paging  
[107] DTMF Receiver Check  
Enables or disables the 6 DTMF receivers to check whether the DTMF receivers are  
activated normally or not. Refer to the Section 6 Troubleshooting, “While Operating” for  
further information on checking the DTMF receivers.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
STORE  
DTMF receiver no.*  
7
1
0
NEXT  
SELECT  
END  
(Enable/  
(1··6)  
Disable)  
* DTMF receiver number: 1 and 2 (for checking extension ports 01 through 08)/  
3 and 4 (for checking extension ports 09 through 16)/  
5 and 6 (for checking extension ports 17 through 24)  
Default  
All DTMF receivers – Enable  
[108] Recall Mode for a Locked Extension  
Enables or disables a locked extension to send a recall signal during a conversation with an  
external party.  
END  
1
0
8
NEXT  
SELECT  
STORE  
(Enable/  
Disable)  
Default  
Disable  
4-18  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[109]-[110]  
[109] CO Indicator Assignment  
Enables or disables an extension which was assigned not to ring in programs [408]-[410]  
“Flexible Ringing Assignment” to answer an incoming outside call. The line key indicator  
will flash when an outside call is received. If enabled, an extension user can answer the call  
by pressing the flashing line key. If disabled, the user cannot answer the call even if they  
press the line key.  
1
0
9
NEXT  
SELECT STORE  
END  
(Enable/  
Disable)  
Default  
Enable  
• The extension must be a proprietary telephone with a line key and indicator.  
!
[110] Recall Key Mode  
Assigns the sending of the recall signal mode, MODE 1 or MODE 2, when the RECALL  
button on a proprietary telephone is pressed.  
MODE 1: The recall signal is sent during the programmed time in [418] “Recall Time”.  
MODE 2: The recall signal is sent while the RECALL button is pressed if the time the  
RECALL button was pressed is more than the programmed time in [418].  
This will be useful to disconnect the current call and make another call  
without hanging up. If the time the RECALL button was pressed is less than  
the programmed time in [418], the recall signal will be sent during the  
programmed time.  
1
0
1
NEXT  
SELECT  
STORE  
END  
(MODE1/  
MODE2)  
Default  
MODE 1  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Recall  
☞
System Programming  
4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[111]-[112]  
4.2  
System Programming  
[111] Hold Music Selection  
Selects the music source, External or Tone, which an external party will hear when an  
outside call is on hold.  
External : Uses an external music source, such as a radio.  
Tone : Uses the cyclic tone below equipped with the system.  
1 s  
1
1
1
NEXT  
SELECT  
STORE  
END  
(External/Tone)  
Default  
External  
• The music source can also be used for BGM.  
!
☞
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Music on Hold / Background Music (BGM)  
[112] DSS Console Indication Mode  
Enables or disables the Busy Lamp Field (BLF) on the DSS button to indicate the status,  
Forward (FWD) or Do Not Disturb (DND), of corresponding extensions.  
NEXT  
SELECT  
STORE  
END  
1
1
2
(Enable/  
Disable)*  
* Enable: FWD – Flashing slowly, DND – Flashing moderately  
Disable: FWD – Off, DND – Off  
Default  
Enable  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
DSS Console  
☞
4-20  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[115]-[116]  
[115] Extension Ringing Pattern Selection  
Selects the extension ringing pattern when an intercom call received, either Single, Double  
or Triple.  
1 s  
Single:  
Double:  
Triple:  
1
5
1
NEXT  
SELECT  
STORE  
END  
(Single/Double/  
Triple)  
Default  
Single  
• The length of the ring cycle for a single line telephone (SLT) is determined in program  
[124] “SLT Ringing Mode Selection”.  
• The extension ringback pattern is determined at the same time.  
!
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
☞
Ringing Pattern Selection  
[116] Conference Pattern Selection  
Selects the maximum number of external parties which can attend a conference. The  
maximum number of conference parties is 5.  
3-party C-0 E-3: No external parties can attend a 3-party conference.  
3-party C-1 E-3: One external party can attend a 3-party conference.  
3-party C-2 E-3: A maximum of 2 external parties can attend a 3-party conference.  
5-party C-2 E-5: A maximum of 2 external parties can attend a 5-party conference.  
1
1
6
NEXT  
SELECT  
STORE  
END  
(3-party C-0 E-3/  
3-party C-1 E-3/  
3-party C-2 E-3/  
5-party C-2 E-5)  
Default  
5-party C-2 E-5  
• Feature References  
Section 3, Features  
☞
Conference (3-Party), Conference (5-Party)  
System Programming  
4-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[117]-[119]  
4.2  
System Programming  
[117] Call Pickup Tone  
Enables or disables the confirmation tone when the Call Pickup feature is activated.  
NEXT  
SELECT  
STORE  
END  
1
1
7
(Enable/  
Disable)  
Default  
Enable  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Call Pickup  
☞
[118] Pulse Restriction  
Enables or disables sending pulse dialling to the Local Exchange during a conversation with  
an external party when “Pulse Mode” or “Call Block Mode” is selected in program [401]  
“Dial Mode”.  
1
1
8
NEXT  
SELECT  
STORE  
END  
(Enable/  
Disable)  
Default  
Enable  
[119] Redialling after Pulse to Tone Conversion  
Enables or disables sending tone dialling to the Local Exchange when an extension user  
redials after changing the pulse mode into tone mode by pressing and #.  
1
1
9
NEXT  
SELECT  
STORE  
END  
(Enable/  
Disable)  
Default  
Disable  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
☞
Pulse to Tone Conversion  
4-22  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[120]-[122]  
[120] Bell Frequency  
Selects the bell frequency sent to a single line telephone (SLT).  
2
0
1
NEXT  
SELECT  
STORE  
END  
(20/25 Hz)  
Default  
25 Hz  
[121] Automatic Exchange Line Access Number Selection  
Selects the Automatic Exchange Line Access number ( 0 or 9).  
1
2
1
NEXT  
SELECT  
STORE  
END  
(Dial 0/Dial 9)  
Default  
Dial 9  
• If you select “0”, the operator call will automatically be “9”. If you select “9”, the  
operator call will automatically be “0”  
!
• Feature References  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Automatic Exchange Line Access Number, Operator Call  
[122] Automatic Rotation for Exchange Line Access  
Enables or disables the rotation of exchange lines seized for “Automatic Exchange Line  
Access”.  
NEXT  
SELECT  
STORE  
END  
1
2
2
(Enable  
Disable)  
Default  
Disable (Does not rotate.)  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
☞
Automatic Exchange Line Access Number  
System Programming  
4-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[123]-[125]  
4.2  
System Programming  
[123] Break Ratio  
Selects the pulse break rate, MODE1 or MODE 2, when a Pulse is sent to the Local  
Exchange during a conversation.  
MODE 1: 66 %  
MODE 2: 60 %  
NEXT  
SELECT  
STORE  
END  
1
2
3
(MODE1/  
MODE2)  
Default  
MODE 1  
[124] SLT Ringing Mode Selection  
Selects the length of the ring cycle for a single line telephone (SLT).  
MODE 1: 5 second cycle  
MODE 2: 3 second cycle  
NEXT  
SELECT  
STORE  
END  
1
2
4
(MODE1/  
MODE2)  
Default  
MODE 2  
[125] Call Barring Check for  
and #  
Assigns whether the entered “ ” and “#” are checked by call barring or not. This  
assignment is required for certain Local Exchanges to prevent toll fraud. Some Central  
Offices ignore the user-dialled “ ” and “#”. If your Local Exchange ignores these symbols,  
select “Disable”.  
.
NEXT  
SELECT  
STORE  
END  
1
2
5
(Enable/  
Disable)  
Default  
Enable  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Call Barring  
☞
4-24  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[126]-[127]  
[126] DSS Off-Hook Mode  
Enables or disables making an intercom call just by pressing a DSS button on a DSS  
Console. If enabled, going off-hook is not needed.  
.
NEXT  
SELECT  
STORE  
END  
1
6
2
(Enable/  
Disable)  
Default  
Enable  
• This assignment is also effective for a flexible line key on a proprietary telephone  
assigned as a DSS button.  
!
☞
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Intercom Calling  
[127] Pickup Group Set  
Enables or disables the ability of an extension to pickup a call ringing at another extension  
(if it is in the same extension group) by just going off-hook. If enabled, the feature number  
(40) is not needed to pickup the call.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
2
7
1
NEXT  
extension group no.*  
SELECT  
STORE  
END  
(1···8/  
)
(Enable/  
Disable)  
To continue  
SELECT  
* Extension group number: 1 through 8 / (all extension groups)  
Default  
All extension groups – Disable (the feature number (40) is required to pickup  
the call)  
• To prevent other extensions in the same extension group from picking up outside calls by  
just going off-hook, select “Disable” in program [109] “CO Indicator Assignment”. Then  
even though “Enable” is selected in this program [127], outside calls cannot be picked up  
by others by just going off-hook.  
!
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Call Pickup  
☞
System Programming  
4-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[200]-[201]  
4.2  
System Programming  
[200] Hold Recall Time  
Assigns the length of the hold recall timer. Hold recall (a ring tone or an alarm tone) is  
heard when the timer expires. If hold recall is not required, select “Disable”.  
NEXT  
0
0
2
SELECT  
STORE  
END  
(30 sec/  
1/1.5/2/3/4/5/6 min/  
Disable)  
Default  
30 seconds  
• Feature References  
Section 3, Features  
Call Park, Hold  
☞
[201] Transfer Recall Time  
Assigns the length of the transfer recall timer. If a transferred call is not answered within the  
programmed time, the call will be returned to the original caller.  
2
0
1
NEXT  
STORE  
SELECT  
END  
(15/30 sec/  
1/2 min)  
Default  
30 seconds  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
☞
Call Transfer – to Extension  
4-26  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[202]-[203]  
[202] Call Forwarding Start Time  
Assigns time for the Call Forwarding – No Answer feature. If a call is not answered within  
the programmed time, the call will be forwarded to the destination.  
2
0
2
NEXT  
STORE  
SELECT  
END  
(5/10/15/20  
sec delay)  
Default  
15 seconds delay  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Call Forwarding  
☞
[203] Pickup Dial Delay Time  
Assigns the length of time for the Pickup Dialling feature. If the telephone user lifts the  
handset, the programmed party is called automatically when the timer expires. This delay  
gives the user an opportunity to enter numbers before automatic dialling occurs.  
STORE  
2
0
3
NEXT  
SELECT  
END  
(1/2/3/4 sec)  
Default  
3 seconds  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Pickup Dialling  
☞
System Programming  
4-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[204], [206]  
4.2  
System Programming  
[204] Call Duration Count Start Time  
Assigns the start time of a conversation either immediately after an exchange line is seized  
or after dialling. This corresponds to the length of the conversation displayed on the LCD  
and printed on the printer (SMDR).  
2
0
4
NEXT  
STORE  
SELECT  
END  
(5/10/15/20/25/30/  
35/40/45/50 sec after  
dial/Instantly)  
Default  
10 seconds after dialling  
• If reverse signal detection is enabled in program [424] “Reverse (Polarity) Circuit  
Assignment”, the system will automatically start the timer immediately after an external  
party answers a call.  
!
• Feature References  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Polarity Reverse Detection, Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)  
[206] Dialling Start Time  
Assigns the minimum length of the pause time the system waits before dialling after seizing  
an exchange line.  
2
0
6
NEXT  
STORE  
SELECT  
END  
(0/250/500/750/  
1000/1250/1500 ms)  
Default  
0 millisecond  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Outside Calling  
☞
4-28  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[207]-[208]  
[207] Recall Timing Range Selection  
Sets the hookswitch recall time range sent from an extension to the system.  
MODE 1: 50 to 180 milliseconds.  
MODE 2: 80 to 180 milliseconds.  
MODE 3: 80 to 650 milliseconds.  
MODE 4: 80 to 1000 milliseconds.  
MODE 5: 200 to 1000 milliseconds.  
2
0
NEXT  
STORE  
7
SELECT  
END  
(MODE1/MODE2/  
MODE3/MODE4/  
MODE5)  
Default  
MODE 1  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
☞
Recall Button on a Single Line Telephone  
[208] Interdigit Time  
Assigns the maximum time allowed between digits for an outgoing outside call.  
2
0
8
NEXT  
STORE  
SELECT  
END  
(5/10/15/20 sec)  
Default  
20 seconds  
• The interdigit timer applies until the call barring check is completed. When the timer  
expires, an outgoing outside call will be disconnected while dialling, if “Enable” was  
selected in program [211] “No Dial Disconnection”.  
• For a single line telephone, an outgoing outside call will be released from a DTMF  
receiver when the interdigit timer expires.  
!
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Call Barring  
☞
System Programming  
4-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[210]-[211]  
4.2  
System Programming  
[210] DTMF Time  
Assigns the minimum duration of a DTMF signal sent to an exchange line which is set to the  
DTMF mode in program [401] “Dial Mode”.  
MODE 1: 80 milliseconds  
MODE 2: 160 milliseconds  
2
1
0
NEXT  
STORE  
SELECT  
END  
(MODE1/  
MODE2)  
Default  
MODE 1  
[211] No Dial Disconnection  
Enables or disables disconnecting an exchange line if an extension user does not dial  
anything within 20 seconds after an exchange line is seized.  
END  
2
1
NEXT  
STORE  
1
SELECT  
(Enable/  
Disable)  
Default  
Enable (Disconnect)  
• The interdigit timer assigned in program [208] “Interdigit Time” applies until the call  
barring check is completed. When the timer expires, an outgoing outside call will be  
disconnected while dialling, if “Enable” was selected in this program.  
!
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Call Barring  
☞
4-30  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[212]-[213]  
[212] Exchange Line Duration Time Limit  
Sets the maximum time allowed for a conversation with an external party. This program is  
effective for the extension(s) which assigned “Enable” in program [613] “Exchange Line  
Duration Time Limit Selection”.  
time  
2
1
2
NEXT  
STORE  
END  
(1··32 minutes)  
Default  
10 minutes  
• A beep sounds at 5-second intervals 15 seconds before the programmed time expires.  
• This program is effective only for an outgoing outside call.  
• When making a call after an exchange line is seized and transferred to the enabled  
extension in program [613] by another extension, the timer starts after the call has been  
transferred.  
!
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
☞
Limited Call Duration  
[213] Bell Off Detection  
Sets the maximum time between detecting one bell signal and the next from the Local  
Exchange. In case the next bell signal is not detected within the programmed time, the  
system recognises the bell signal has stopped.  
END  
2
1
3
NEXT  
STORE  
SELECT  
(3/6/12 sec)  
Default  
3 seconds  
System Programming  
4-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[300]-[301]  
4.2  
System Programming  
[300] Carrier Excepted Code Assignment  
Assigns up to 20 carrier excepted codes, for example, Per Call Block code ( 141). The  
system disregards the assigned code, and call barring and ARS are applied to the numbers  
after the code.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
STORE  
code no.  
code  
3
0
0
NEXT  
END  
10 digits max.  
(0···9, ,#)  
(01···20)  
To continue  
SELECT  
Example:  
Code no. 01:  
Dialling number:  
disregarded  
141  
141 01633 877 467  
applied to the call barring and ARS  
All codes – Not stored.  
Default  
• “x” (press the PAUSE button) substitutes any number (= wild card).  
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.  
!
[301] Call Barring – System Speed Dialling Boundary Class  
Assigns the call barring class for System Speed Dialling numbers. System Speed Dialling  
numbers can be assigned in program [001] “System Speed Dialling Entry”.  
3
0
1
NEXT  
STORE  
END  
SELECT  
(Class-1···5)*  
* Boundary Class: 1 through 5  
Default Boundary Class -1  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
☞
Call Barring for System Speed Dialling  
4-32  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[302]-[305]  
[302]-[305] Call Barring – Classes 2 through 5 Denied Codes  
Assigns up to 20 toll call numbers which are restricted to make outside calls on a class of  
service (COS) basis for each program.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
code no.  
phone no.  
END  
STORE  
3
0
NEXT  
X
11 digits  
(01···20)  
(0···9, ,#)  
To continue  
SELECT  
X – Program address selection number: 2 ([302] for Class 2) / 3 ([303] for Class 3)/  
4 ([304] for Class 4) / 5 ([305] for Class 5)  
Default  
All codes – Not stored.  
• “x” (press the PAUSE button) substitutes any number (= wild card).  
• Each phone number should consist of 11 digits.  
!
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Call Barring  
☞
System Programming  
4-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[306], [309]  
4.2  
System Programming  
[306] Call Barring – Exception Codes  
Assigns up to 80 exception numbers which are allowed to make outside calls on a class of  
service (COS) basis even when denied codes are programmed in [302]-[305] “Call Barring  
– Classes 2 through 5 Denied Codes”.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
code no.  
phone no.  
11 digits  
STORE  
3
0
6
NEXT  
END  
(01···80)  
(0···9, ,#)  
To continue  
SELECT  
Default  
All codes – Not stored.  
• “x” (press the PAUSE button) substitutes any number (= wild card).  
• Each phone number should consist of 11 digits.  
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.  
!
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Call Barring  
☞
[309] Emergency Dial Number Set  
Assigns up to 5 emergency numbers, for example, a police station or fire station. Calls with  
these numbers are free from restrictions, for example, call barring, Account Code –  
Forced/Verify–All mode and Electronic Extension Lock.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
STORE  
emergency no.  
code no.  
3
0
9
NEXT  
END  
11 digits max.  
(0···9)  
(1···5)  
To continue  
SELECT  
Default  
Code-01 = 999, Code-02 = 112, Other codes = Not stored.  
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.  
!
☞
• Feature References  
Section 3, Features  
Emergency Call, Call Barring  
4-34  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[310]-[311]  
[310] Account Codes  
Assigns up to 24 account codes which are compared with the code entered when  
“Verify-All” or “Verify-Toll (Call Barring)” is selected in program [605] “Account Code  
Entry Mode”. If “Verify-All” is selected, an account code is required to make an outside  
call. If “Verify-Toll (Call Barring)” is selected, an account code is only required to override  
call barring.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
STORE  
account code  
3
1
0
NEXT  
code no.  
END  
4 digits  
(0···9)  
(01···24)  
To continue  
SELECT  
Default  
All codes – Not stored.  
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.  
!
• Feature References  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Account Code Entry, Call Barring Override by Account Codes  
[311] Automatic Pause Insertion Codes  
Assigns up to 40 automatic pause insertion codes which are checked with the outside  
outgoing call number. When one of the codes is the same as the call number, the pause time  
assigned in program [417] “Pause Time” is automatically inserted after the code. If a second  
dial tone is sent from your Local Exchange, it is convenient to assign the area code as the  
pause code.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
STORE  
code no.  
pause code  
3
1
1
NEXT  
END  
7 digits max.  
(0···9, ,#)  
(01···40)  
To continue  
SELECT  
Default  
All codes – Not stored.  
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.  
!
System Programming  
4-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[312]  
4.2  
System Programming  
[312] Call Barring – Extension Lock Boundary Class  
Assigns the Call Barring class for an extension which has set the Electronic Extension  
Lockout or Remote Extension Lock Control.  
3
NEXT  
SELECT  
STORE  
END  
1
2
(Disable/  
COS-2···5)*  
* Boundary COS: 2 through 5 / Disable (Disables all outside outgoing calls.)  
Default Disable  
• Feature Reference  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Call Barring – Extension Lock Boundary Class  
4-36  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[350]-[354]  
[350] ARS Selection  
Enables or disables the ARS feature for each exchange line.  
NEXT or  
PREV  
To continue  
exchange line no.*  
3
5
0
NEXT  
SELECT  
STORE  
END  
(1···6/  
)
(Enable/  
Disable)  
To continue  
SELECT  
* Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)  
Default All exchange lines – Disable  
• Feature Reference  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)  
[351]-[354] Routes 1 through 4 Selection Codes (Leading Digits)  
Assigns up to 80 area codes for outside calls which are applied to the ARS feature for each  
route.  
or  
NEXT  
PREV  
To continue  
code no.  
area code  
END  
STORE  
5
3
NEXT  
X
7 digits max.  
(0···9, ,#)  
(01···80)  
(1···4)  
To continue  
SELECT  
X – Program address selection number: 1 ([351] for Route 1) / 2 ([352] for Route 2)/  
3 ([353] for Route 3) / 4 ([354] for Route 4)  
Default  
All codes – Not stored.  
• “x” (press the PAUSE button) substitutes any number (= wild card).  
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.  
!
• Feature Reference  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)  
System Programming  
4-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[355]-[359]  
4.2  
System Programming  
[355]-[358] Routes 1 through 4 Exception Codes  
Assigns up to 80 area codes for outside calls which are not applied to the ARS feature for  
each route.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
code no.  
area code  
END  
STORE  
3
5
NEXT  
X
7 digits max.  
(0···9, ,#)  
(01···80)  
(5···8)  
To continue  
SELECT  
X – Program address selection number: 5 ([355] for Route 1) / 6 ([356] for Route 2)/  
7 ([357] for Route 3) / 8 ([358] for Route 4)  
Default  
All codes – Not stored.  
• “x” (press the PAUSE button) substitutes any number (= wild card).  
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.  
!
• Feature Reference  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)  
[359] 1st Carrier Selection Code (BT Line Access Code)  
Assigns the first carrier access code. When the code is dialled, the first carrier is always  
selected even if the ARS feature is enabled.  
1st carrier access code  
END  
STORE  
3
5
9
NEXT  
4 digits max.  
(0···9)  
Default  
121 (British Telecom Line access code)  
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.  
!
☞
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)  
4-38  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[360]-[361]  
[360] ARS Modification – Removed Digits  
Determines how the dialled number applied to the ARS feature should be modified before  
sending to the exchange line for each route. The digits are deleted from the beginning of the  
dialled number.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
route no.  
removed digits  
END  
STORE  
3
6
0
NEXT  
(1···4)  
(0···9)  
To continue  
SELECT  
Default  
All routes – 0 (No deletion)  
• Feature Reference  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)  
[361] ARS Modification – Added Number  
Determines how the dialled number applied to the ARS feature should be modified before  
sending to the exchange line for each route. Numbers are added to the beginning of the  
dialled number. Numbers can be carrier codes, etc.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
route no.  
added number  
20 digits max.  
(0···9, ,#)  
END  
STORE  
3
6
NEXT  
1
(1···4)  
To continue  
SELECT  
Default  
Route 1 = 131, Other routes = Not stored.  
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.  
• Press to scroll the display to the right side.  
• The assigned numbers will be added to the dialled number after deleting the digits  
programmed in [360] “ARS Modification — Removed Digits”.  
!
• Feature Reference  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)  
System Programming  
4-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[362]-[363]  
4.2  
System Programming  
[362] ARS Dial Tone Pattern Selection  
Selects the dial tone pattern, Disable (no tone), Tone1, Tone2 or Tone3, generated after  
seizing an ARS exchange line. The ARS feature is enabled on an exchange line basis in  
program [350] “ARS Selection”. The tone will stop after the first digit (except for an  
account code) is dialled.  
1 s  
Tone1:  
Tone2:  
Tone3:  
6
2
STORE  
END  
3
NEXT  
SELECT  
(Disable/Tone1/  
Tone2/Tone3)  
Default  
Tone1  
• Feature Reference  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)  
[363] ARS Interdigit Time  
Assigns the interdigit timer (in seconds) used while the system is checking the dialled  
number for the ARS feature.  
time  
6
STORE  
END  
3
3
NEXT  
(1···20)  
Default  
5 seconds  
• This assignment should be the same as the interdigit timer assigned in program [208]  
“Interdigit Time”.  
!
☞
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)  
4-40  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[364]  
[364] ARS Trunk Group  
Assigns trunk group(s) for each ARS route number. Trunk groups are assigned in program  
[404] “Trunk Group Assignment”. An exchange line in the assigned trunk group(s) is  
automatically seized when making an outside call using the Automatic Exchange Line  
Access number (9 or 0), and the dialled number is applied to one of the ARS route numbers.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
3
6
4
NEXT  
route no.  
trunk group no.*  
STORE  
END  
(1···4)  
(1···6/  
)
To continue  
SELECT  
* Trunk (TRK) group number: 1 through 6 /  
(All trunk (TRK) groups)  
Default All routes – (All trunk (TRK) groups)  
• Programs [351]-[354] “Routes 1 through 4 Selection Codes (Leading Digits)” should be  
considered when assigning this program.  
!
• Feature Reference  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)  
System Programming  
4-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[381]-[384]  
4.2  
System Programming  
[381]-[384] Routes 1 through 4 Authorisation Codes  
Registers an authorisation code applied to the exchange line(s).  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
authorisation code  
exchange line no.*  
END  
STORE  
3
8
NEXT  
X
19 digits max.  
(0···9)  
(1···6/  
)
(1···4)  
To continue  
SELECT  
X – Program address selection number: 1 ([351] for Route 1) / 2 ([352] for Route 2)/  
3 ([353] for Route 3) / 4 ([354] for Route 4)  
* Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)  
Default  
All exchange lines – Not stored.  
• The registered codes are not shown on the display of a proprietary telephone and printout  
by program [804] “System Data Damp” after programming. “Already Set” will be shown  
instead of the registered codes.  
!
4-42  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[385]-[389]  
[385]-[388] Routes 1 through 4 Itemised Bill  
Enables or disables to add an extension number assigned in program [389] “Itemised Bill  
Code Assignment” after the authorisation code for an exchange line(s). This is useful for  
billing purposes.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
STORE  
exchange line no.*  
END  
8
SELECT  
3
NEXT  
X
(1···6/  
)
(Enable/  
(5···8)  
To continue  
Disable)  
SELECT  
X – Program address selection number: 5 ([385] for Route 1) / 2 ([386] for Route 2)/  
3 ([387] for Route 3) / 4 ([388] for Route 4)  
* Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)  
Default  
All exchange lines – Disable  
• Feature Reference  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)  
[389] Itemised Bill Code Assignment  
Assigns the itemised bill code for each extension for dividing a bill.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
STORE  
itemised bill code.  
extension port no.  
3
8
9
NEXT  
END  
3 digits max.  
(0···9)  
(01···24/  
)
To continue  
SELECT  
* Extension port number: 01 through 16 / (All extension ports)  
Default Extension ports 01 through 24 – 201 through 224  
• Feature Reference  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)  
System Programming  
4-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[400]-[401]  
4.2  
System Programming  
[400] Exchange Line Connection Assignment  
Assigns which exchange line(s) is connected to the system or not.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
STORE  
exchange line no.*  
4
0
0
NEXT  
SELECT  
END  
(1···6/  
)
(Connect/  
Not connect)  
To continue  
SELECT  
* Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)  
Default All exchange lines – Connect  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Outside Calling  
☞
[401] Dial Mode  
Selects the dialling mode, DTMF, Pulse or C. BLK (Call Blocking), for each exchange line.  
DTMF: The dialling signals from an extension, either Tone or Pulse, are converted to  
Tone and transmitted to the Local Exchange. If the system is connected directly  
to the Local Exchange or installed behind a host PBX, which receives both Tone  
and Pulse, select this mode.  
Pulse : The dialling signals from an extension, either Tone or Pulse, are converted to  
Pulse and transmitted to the Local Exchange.  
C. BLK: If your Local Exchange can receive both DTMF and Pulse signals but the user  
are contracted for Pulse, select this mode. When dialling with a touch tone  
telephone, only Pulse signals are sent to the Local Exchange.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
STORE  
4
0
1
NEXT  
exchange line no.*  
END  
SELECT  
(1···6/  
)
(DTMF/Pulse/  
C.BLK Mode)  
To continue  
SELECT  
* Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)  
Default All exchange lines – DTMF Mode  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
☞
Pulse to Tone Conversion  
4-44  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[402]-[403]  
[402] Pulse Speed Selection  
Selects a pulse rate for each exchange line which sets “Pulse Mode” or “Call block Mode” in  
program [401] “Dial Mode”. There are 2 pulse rates, Low Speed (10 pps) and High Speed  
(20 pps).  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
STORE  
exchange line no.*  
SELECT  
END  
4
0
2
NEXT  
(1···6/  
)
(Low/High  
To continue  
Speed)  
SELECT  
* Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)  
Default All exchange lines – Low Speed  
[403] Host PBX Access Codes  
If the system is installed behind a host PBX, each exchange line may require an access code  
to make an outside call. Up to 8 access codes can be stored for each exchange line. When  
the programmed codes are dialled, the pause time assigned in program [417] “Pause Time”  
is automatically inserted, and call barring is applied after the code.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
STORE  
1
2
4
0
3
NEXT  
exchange line no.* access code*  
END  
Up to 8 access codes  
1 or 2 digits  
(0···9)  
(1···6/  
)
To continue  
SELECT  
1
* Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)  
2
,
* Insert a “,” for each code using the  
button on the overlay.  
Example:  
• Access codes 81, 82 on exchange line number 1  
0
NEXT  
STORE  
END  
4
3
1
8
1
8
2
,
Default  
All exchange lines – Not stored  
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.  
!
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Host PBX Access  
☞
System Programming  
4-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[404]  
4.2  
System Programming  
[404] Trunk Group Assignment  
Assigns a maximum 6 trunk groups. Each exchange line must be assigned to an trunk  
group. For example, if there are multiple telephone service companies available, exchange  
lines can be grouped by company.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
STORE  
1
2
4
0
NEXT  
4
exchange line no.*  
trunk group no.*  
END  
(1···6)  
(1···6/  
)
To continue  
SELECT  
1
* Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)  
2
* Trunk (TRK) group number: 1 through 6  
Default  
Exchange line 1 through 6 – Trunk group 1 through 6  
• Each exchange line can only belong to one trunk group.  
!
☞
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Outside Calling  
4-46  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[405]-[407]  
[405]-[407] Flexible Outward Dialling Assignment —Day/Night/Lunch  
Determines which extension(s) can make an outside call in the day, night and/or lunch modes.  
or  
PREV  
To continue  
NEXT  
Go to next or prev. line number  
or  
To continue  
Go to next or prev.  
port number  
1
2
4
exchange line no.*  
(1···6/  
X
(05···07)  
NEXT  
extension port no.*  
STORE  
SELECT  
END  
#
)
(01···24/  
)
(Enable/  
Disable)  
To continue  
Go to another port number  
To continue  
Go to another line number  
SELECT  
X – Program address selection number: 05 ([405] for day) / 06 ([406] for night) /  
07 ([407] for lunch)  
* Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)  
* Extension port number: 01 through 24 / (All extension ports)  
1
2
Default  
All exchange lines – all extension ports – Enable  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Outside Calling  
☞
System Programming  
4-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[408]-[410]  
4.2  
System Programming  
[408]-[410] Flexible Ringing Assignment —Day/Night/Lunch  
Determines which extension(s) will ring for incoming outside calls in the day, night and/or  
lunch modes.  
or  
PREV  
To continue  
NEXT  
Go to next or prev. line number  
or  
To continue  
Go to next or prev.  
port number  
1
2
4
exchange line no.*  
(1···6/  
X
NEXT  
extension port no.*  
STORE  
SELECT  
END  
#
)
(08···10)  
(01···24/  
)
(Enable/  
Disable)  
To continue  
Go to another port number  
To continue  
SELECT  
Go to another line number  
X – Program address selection number: 08 ([408] for day) / 09 ([409] for night) /  
10 ([410] for lunch)  
(All exchange lines)  
* Extension port number: 01 through 24 / (All extension ports)  
1
* Exchange line number: 1 through 6  
2
Default All exchange lines – all extension ports – Enable  
• Feature References  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Exchange Line Ringing Selection, Uniform Call Distribution (UCD),  
Receiving Calls  
4-48  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[411]-[413]  
[411]-[413] Delayed Ringing Assignment —Day/Night/Lunch  
Assigns the ringing start time for extension(s) which were selected to ring in programs  
[408]-[410] “Flexible Ringing Assignment —Day/Night/Lunch” in the day, night and/or lunch  
modes.  
or  
PREV  
To continue  
NEXT  
Go to next or prev. line number  
or  
To continue  
Go to next or prev.  
port number  
1
2
4
exchange line no.*  
(1···6/  
X
(11···13  
NEXT  
extension port no.*  
STORE  
SELECT  
END  
#
)
)
(01···24/  
)
(Immdtly/  
10/20/30 sec)  
To continue  
Go to another port number  
To continue  
Go to another line number  
SELECT  
X – Program address selection number: 11 ([411] for day) / 12 ([412] for night)/  
13 ([413] for lunch)  
* Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)  
* Extension port number: 01 through 24 / (All extension ports)  
1
2
Default  
All exchange lines – all extension ports – Immediately  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Receiving Calls  
☞
System Programming  
4-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[414]-[416]  
4.2  
System Programming  
[414]-[416] Exchange Line Mode —Day/Night/Lunch  
Selects the mode of an incoming outside call on each exchange Line in the day, night and  
lunch modes. There are the following 5 modes.  
Normal: An incoming outside call will be received at the extension(s) assigned in  
programs [408]–[410] “Flexible Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch”.  
DIL:  
An incoming outside call will be received at the assigned extension in this  
program.  
DISA1: An incoming outside call will be received at an extension through the DISA  
feature. A caller will hear a tone or an outgoing message.  
DISA2: An incoming outside call will be received at an extension through the DISA  
feature. A caller might hear OGM 2; for various configurations please see Cases  
2, 3 and 4 in Section 3, Features “Outgoing Message (OGM).  
UCD: An incoming outside call will be received at an extension through the UCD  
feature.  
< To select Normal,  
DISA or UCD >  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
STORE  
1
exchange line no.*  
4
NEXT  
X
END  
SELECT  
(1···6/  
)
(14···16)  
(Normal/DIL/  
DISA1/DISA2/  
UCD)  
To continue  
SELECT  
< To select DIL >  
or  
PREV  
To continue  
NEXT  
1
2
4
exchange line no.*  
(1···6/  
X
NEXT  
extension port no.*  
SELECT  
END  
STORE  
)
(14···16)  
(01···24/  
)
(Normal/DIL/  
DISA1/DISA2/  
UCD)  
To continue  
SELECT  
X – Program address selection number: 14 ([414] for day) / 15 ([415] for night)/  
16 ([416] for lunch)  
* Exchange Line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)  
* Extension port number: 01 through 24 / (All extension ports)  
1
2
Default  
All exchange lines – Normal  
4-50  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[414]-[417]  
• You must select “DISA1”when the optional OGM/FAX Detection card is not installed and  
if you want to use the internal DISA.  
• When you select “UCD”, assign program [520] “UCD Group” to determine which  
extension group is assigned to the UCD group.  
!
• When you select “DISA1”, “DISA2” and/or “UCD”, assign program [502] “OGM Mode  
Selection” to determine which OGM will be used.  
• Feature References  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Direct In Line (DIL), Direct Inward System Access (DISA),  
Outgoing Message (OGM), Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)  
[417] Pause Time  
Assigns the length of the pause time. The programmed pause time is automatically inserted  
after a line access code, a host PBX access code programmed in [403] “Host PBX Access  
Codes” or a pause code assigned in [311] “Automatic Pause Insertion Codes” or can be  
manually inserted by the user using the PAUSE button.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
4
END  
1
7
NEXT  
exchange line no.*  
SELECT  
STORE  
(1.5/2.5/  
3.5/4.5 sec)  
(1···6/  
)
To continue  
SELECT  
* Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)  
Default All exchange lines – 1.5 seconds  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Host PBX Access  
☞
System Programming  
4-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[418]-[419]  
4.2  
System Programming  
[418] Recall Time  
Assigns the length of the recall time. If your system is installed behind a host PBX, External  
Feature Access is necessary to obtain its services. To enable it, select the required recall  
signal sending time for an exchange line.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
STORE  
exchange line no.*  
4
1
8
NEXT  
END  
SELECT  
(1···6/  
)
(80/100/160/  
300/600/900/  
1200 ms)  
To continue  
SELECT  
* Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)  
Default All exchange lines – 100 milliseconds  
• Feature References  
Section 3, Features  
☞
External Feature Access, Recall  
[419] Automatic Designated Exchange Line Access  
Selects which exchange line can be seized automatically when an extension user dials the  
Automatic Line Access number (0 or 9) assigned in program [121] “Automatic Exchange  
Line Access Number Selection”.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
STORE  
4
NEXT  
exchange line no.*  
1
9
SELECT  
END  
( 1···6/  
)
(Enable/  
Disable)  
To continue  
SELECT  
* Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)  
Default All exchange lines – Enable  
• Feature References  
Section 3, Features  
☞
Automatic Exchange Line Access Number, Outside Calling  
4-52  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[420]  
[420] Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal  
Assigns the required minimum duration of the Calling Party Control (CPC) signal from the  
Local Exchange for incoming outside calls. If programmed, the system disconnects the line  
when the CPC signal is detected.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
STORE  
4
2
0
NEXT  
exchange line no.*  
X
END  
(1···6/  
)
(00···75  
)
To continue  
SELECT  
* Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)  
X – CPC signal detect time selection number: No. = selection number  
Detect time (milliseconds)  
No. Detect time  
No. Detect time  
No. Detect time  
No. Detect time  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
Disable  
22  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
166  
174  
182  
190  
198  
206  
214  
222  
230  
238  
246  
254  
262  
270  
278  
286  
294  
302  
310  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
318  
326  
334  
342  
350  
358  
366  
374  
382  
390  
398  
406  
414  
422  
430  
438  
446  
454  
462  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
470  
478  
486  
494  
502  
510  
518  
526  
534  
542  
550  
558  
566  
574  
582  
590  
598  
606  
614  
30  
38  
46  
54  
62  
70  
78  
86  
94  
102  
110  
118  
126  
134  
142  
150  
158  
Default  
All exchange lines – Disable (No. 00)  
• Feature Reference  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection  
System Programming  
4-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[421]-[422]  
4.2  
System Programming  
[421] CPC Detection for Outgoing Calls  
Enables or disables the CPC signal detection during an outgoing outside call. If disabled,  
the CPC signal detection is only activated during an incoming outside call or after call hold.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
STORE  
4
2
1
NEXT  
exchange line no.*  
END  
SELECT  
(1···6/  
)
(Enable/  
Disable) To continue  
SELECT  
* Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)  
Default All exchange lines – Disable  
• Feature Reference  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection  
[422] Disconnect Time  
Determines the amount of time to send the disconnect signal from the system to the Local  
Exchange or host PBX. The time you select must be longer than the requirement of your  
Local Exchange or host PBX.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
STORE  
exchange line no.*  
4
NEXT  
SELECT  
END  
2
2
(1···6/  
)
(0.5/2.0/  
4.0 sec)  
To continue  
SELECT  
* Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)  
Default All exchange lines – 2.0 seconds  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Recall  
☞
4-54  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[423]  
[423] Exchange Line Ringing Pattern Selection  
Selects the incoming outside call ringing pattern, Single, Double or Triple, for each  
exchange line. This is useful for distinguishing private calls from business calls.  
1 s  
Single:  
Double:  
Triple:  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
STORE  
exchange line no.*  
4
3
NEXT  
SELECT  
END  
2
(1···6/  
)
(Single/Double/  
Triple)  
To continue  
SELECT  
* Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)  
Default All exchange lines – Double  
• When selecting the ring pattern illustrated above, we recommend that other ring patterns of  
the system be considered. Namely, please consider the settings of [115] “Extension Ringing  
Pattern Selection” and [706] “Doorphone Ringing/Tone Pattern Selection”.  
!
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
☞
Ringing Pattern Selection  
System Programming  
4-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[424]  
4.2  
System Programming  
[424] Reverse (Polarity) Circuit Assignment  
Enables or disables detecting the reverse signal for each exchange line’s polarity from the  
Local Exchange when making a call. If enabled, the outside call duration can be  
determined.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
exchange line no.*  
NEXT  
4
2
4
SELECT  
STORE  
END  
(1···6/  
)
(Enable/  
To continue  
Disable)  
SELECT  
* Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)  
Default All exchange lines – Disable  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
☞
Polarity Reverse Detection  
4-56  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[500]  
[500] DISA Incoming Dialling Mode Selection  
Selects the destination of an incoming outside call via the DISA feature when you select  
“DISA 1” or “DISA 2” in programs [414]-[416] “Exchange Line Mode –Day/Night/Lunch”,  
Without AA (auto attendant) or With AA . If you select “With AA”, assign the next  
program [501] “DISA Built-in Auto Attendant”.  
Without AA: Available destinations are: extension numbers assigned in program  
[009] “Extension Number Assignment” and the operator number (0 or 9).  
With AA:  
Available destinations are: numbers available in the “Without AA” mode,  
and numbers (0 through 9) assigned in program [501].  
5
0
0
NEXT  
SELECT  
STORE  
END  
(Without AA/  
With AA)  
Default  
Without AA  
• For example: in the “With AA” mode, if a number is not dialled within the programmed  
time in [517] “DISA AA Wait Time” after dialling 1, the call is received at the DISA  
built-in auto attendant number 1.  
!
• In the “With AA” mode, if 0 or 9 is not assigned in program [501], the system recognises  
them as a the operator number.  
• Feature Reference  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)  
System Programming  
4-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[501]  
4.2  
System Programming  
[501] DISA Built-in Auto Attendant  
Assigns a maximum of 10 DISA built-in auto attendant numbers when “With AA” is  
selected in program [500] “DISA Incoming Dialling Mode Selection”. The extension  
numbers assigned in program [009] “Extension Number Assignment”, and the extension  
group numbers assigned in program [600] “Extension Group Assignment” can be assigned as  
a 1 digit number and used as DISA built-in auto attendant numbers.  
extension  
port no.  
(01···24)  
extension  
group no.  
(1···8)  
AA no.  
5
0
1
NEXT  
SELECT  
or  
(0···9)  
(Jack/GRP/  
Not Stored)  
To continue  
or  
PREV  
STORE  
END  
NEXT  
Default  
All auto attendant numbers – Not stored  
• If you would like to use the operator number in the “With AA” mode, do not assign auto  
attendant number(s) which correspond to the operator number (0 or 9).  
!
• Feature Reference  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)  
4-58  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[502]  
[502] OGM Mode Selection  
Selects how the 2 outgoing messages (OGM1 and OGM2) are used, MODE1 through  
MODE6.  
Mode OGM1 OGM2  
Description  
1
2
3
4
DISA1 DISA1 The system can receive 2 incoming calls via the DISA feature  
at the same time. This is useful when receiving many calls.  
DISA1 DISA2 An example: DISA1 is used in the day mode and DISA2 is  
used in the night mode.  
UCD  
UCD  
The system can hold up to 2 incoming calls via the UCD  
feature at the same time until any extension is available.  
UCD  
UCD-  
END  
The system disconnects an incoming call via the UCD feature  
when the assigned waiting time in [521] “UCD Busy Waiting  
Time” expires.  
5
6
UCD DISA1 An example: UCD is used in the day mode and DISA1 is used  
in the night mode.  
UCD  
DISA  
The system leads an incoming call via the UCD feature to the  
DISA feature by OGM2 when the assigned waiting time in  
[521] “UCD Busy Waiting Time” expires and “Intercept” is  
selected in [523] “UCD Busy Mode”.  
5
0
NEXT  
2
SELECT  
END  
STORE  
(MODE 1/  
2/3/4/5/6)  
Default  
MODE1  
• Programs [414]-[416] “Exchange Line Mode – Day/Night/Lunch” are used to assign  
“DISA1”, “DISA2” or “UCD” to each exchange line according to this assignment.  
• UCD-END is automatically used when “UCD” is assigned in programs [414]-[416],  
“Disconnect” is selected in program [523] “UCD Busy Mode”, and “MODE4” is selected  
in this program.  
!
• DISA is automatically used when “UCD” is assigned in programs [414]-[416], “Intercept”  
is selected in program [523], and “MODE6” is selected in this program.  
• If the optional OGM/FAX Detection card is not installed, this assignment should be  
“MODE1”.  
• Feature References  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Direct Inward System Access (DISA), Outgoing Message (OGM),  
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)  
System Programming  
4-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[503]-[505]  
4.2  
System Programming  
1
[503] FAX Connection *  
Assigns one extension which can receive facsimile data when the system receives a FAX  
(CNG) tone via the DISA feature.  
extension port no.  
END  
STORE  
5
0
NEXT  
3
(01···24)  
Default  
Disable (Not assigned)  
• The assigned extension will automatically have the Data Line Security feature set.  
• To unassign an extension port number, press the CLEAR button in the extension port  
number step.  
!
• Feature References  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Data Line Security, Direct Inward System Access (DISA)  
[504] DISA Delayed Answer Time  
Sets the time from a call being received and answered with the DISA feature.  
END  
STORE  
5
0
NEXT  
4
SELECT  
(0/3/6/12 sec  
)
Default  
3 seconds  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
☞
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)  
1
[505] DISA Waiting Time after OGM *  
Assigns the length of time the system keeps detecting the DTMF signals or FAX (CNG) tone  
after the DISA outgoing message is completed.  
END  
5
STORE  
5
0
NEXT  
SELECT  
(0/5/10/15 sec  
)
Default  
5 seconds  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
☞
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)  
1
* : Required only when the optional OGM/FAX Detection  
Card is installed.  
4-60  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[506]-[507]  
[506] DISA Busy Mode  
Selects the operation when a called extension or all called extensions in an extension group  
enabled in program [100] “Hunting Group Set” via the DISA feature is/are busy.  
Disconnect, Call Waiting or DISA2 is available.  
Disconnect: The call is disconnected after the busy tone.  
Call Waiting: A call waiting tone is sent to the called extension or first called extension  
in the hunting group.  
DISA2:  
OGM2 is sent to the caller and the system waits for another destination  
when the first destination is busy.  
END  
STORE  
5
0
NEXT  
6
SELECT  
(Disconnect/  
Call Waiting/  
DISA2)  
Default  
Disconnect  
• Program [502] “OGM Mode Selection” should be “MODE2”, if “DISA2” was selected in  
this program.  
!
☞
• Feature References  
Section 3, Features  
Direct Inward System Access (DISA), Outgoing Message (OGM)  
[507] DISA Intercept Mode  
Selects the operation when a called extension or extension group via the DISA feature does  
not answer a call within the length of time programmed in [508] “DISA Ringing Time  
before Intercept”. Intercept or Disconnect is available.  
Intercept: The call is redirected depending on [408]-[410] “Flexible Ringing  
Assignment–Day/Night/Lunch” (Intercept Routing – No Answer feature).  
This is useful for business use. For example, the call is forwarded to the  
operator or a Voice Processing System automatically.  
Disconnect: The call is disconnected. This is useful for users who do not want to  
forward the call, for example, to a home.  
END  
STORE  
5
0
NEXT  
7
SELECT  
(Intercept/  
Disconnect)  
Default  
Intercept  
• Feature References  
Section 3, Features  
☞
Direct Inward System Access (DISA), Intercept Routing,  
Voice Mail Integration for KX-TVP100  
System Programming  
4-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[508]-[509]  
4.2  
System Programming  
[508] DISA Ringing Time before Intercept  
Assigns the length of time for the Intercept Routing – No Answer feature (☞ [507] “DISA  
Intercept Mode”, Intercept). When the time expires the system starts to redirect the call to  
the programmed extension(s).  
END  
STORE  
5
0
NEXT  
8
SELECT  
(10/20/30/  
40/60/120 sec)  
Default  
20 seconds  
• Feature References  
Section 3, Features  
☞
Direct Inward System Access (DISA), Intercept Routing  
[509] DISA Ringing Time after Intercept  
Assigns the length of time to call the extension(s) where a call is redirected by the Intercept  
Routing – No Answer feature(☞ [507] “DISA Intercept Mode”, Intercept) after the time  
programmed in [508] “DISA Ringing Time before Intercept” expires. If the call is not  
answered within the programmed time, the call will be disconnected.  
END  
STORE  
5
0
NEXT  
9
SELECT  
(10/20/30/  
40/60/120 sec)  
Default  
20 seconds  
• Feature References  
Section 3, Features  
☞
Direct Inward System Access (DISA), Intercept Routing  
4-62  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[510], [513]  
[510] DISA No Dial Mode  
Selects the operation when the system does not receive either DTMF signals or a FAX  
(CNG) tone after a programmed length of time. If the optional card is installed, then use  
program [505] “DISA Waiting Time after OGM”. If the optional card is not installed, then  
use program [515] “Intercept Time for Internal DISA”. Intercept or Disconnect is  
available.  
Intercept: The call is directed depending on programs [408]-[410] “Flexible Ringing  
Assignment–Day/Night/Lunch” (Intercept Routing – No Answer feature).  
The destination telephone(s) will ring for the time programmed in  
[509] “DISA Ringing Time after Intercept”.  
Disconnect: The call is disconnected.  
END  
STORE  
5
1
NEXT  
0
SELECT  
(Intercept/  
Disconnect)  
(DISA1/  
DISA2)  
To continue  
NEXT  
Default  
DISA 1 and DISA 2 – Intercept  
• Feature References  
Section 3, Features  
☞
Direct Inward System Access (DISA), Intercept Routing  
1
[513] Cyclic Tone Detection*  
Assigns the number of times a cyclic tone is detected while the DISA outgoing message is  
sent so that the system can recognise the end of the DISA call.  
5
1
NEXT  
3
SELECT  
STORE  
END  
(Disable*/  
2/3/4 Times)  
* Disable (Does not detect)  
Default 4 Times  
• Feature References  
Section 3, Features  
☞
Direct Inward System Access (DISA), Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)  
1
* : Required only when the optional OGM/FAX Detection  
Card is installed.  
System Programming  
4-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[514]-[515]  
4.2  
System Programming  
1
[514] FAX Tone Detection*  
Sets the number of times the FAX (CNG) tone must be detected while the DISA outgoing  
message is sent before the system recognises the incoming signal as facsimile data.  
END  
STORE  
5
1
NEXT  
4
SELECT  
(1 Time/2 Times)  
Default  
1 Time  
• The extension which can receive facsimile data must be assigned in program [503] “FAX  
Connection”  
!
• Feature Reference  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)  
[515] Intercept Time for Internal DISA  
Assigns the length of time the system keeps detecting DTMF signals after a call is received  
at the internal DISA. If the system does not receive DTMF signals within the programmed  
time, the call will be intercepted or disconnected according to program [510] “DISA No Dial  
Mode”.  
5
5
1
NEXT  
SELECT  
STORE  
END  
(3/6/9 sec  
)
Default  
3 seconds  
• A cyclic tone and FAX (CNG) tone cannot be detected by the internal DISA.  
!
• Feature Reference  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)  
1
* : Required only when the optional OGM/FAX Detection  
Card is installed.  
4-64  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[516]-[517]  
[516] DISA Incoming Assignment  
Enables or disables each extension to receive an outside call via the DISA feature. If a  
DISA call is received at a disabled extension, the DISA caller will hear a reorder tone and  
the call will be disconnected automatically. For example, it may be convenient to disable the  
president’s extension.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
STORE  
extension port no.*  
END  
6
SELECT  
5
1
NEXT  
(01···24/  
)
(Enable/  
To continue  
Disable)  
SELECT  
* Extension port number: 01 through 24 / (All extension ports)  
Default All extension ports – Enable  
• If a call via the DISA feature is received by an extension group, this program will not work  
for extensions in that extension group. In this case, disabled extensions will still ring.  
!
• Feature Reference  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)  
[517] DISA AA Wait Time  
Selects the time that the system waits for a second digit entry. If the programmed time  
expires, the system will assume that the first digit is a DISA built-in auto attendant number,  
if a number is assigned in program [501] “DISA Built-in Auto Attendant”. For example, if a  
number is not dialled within the programmed time after dialling 1, the system will assume  
that “1” is the auto attendant number.  
END  
STORE  
5
1
7
NEXT  
SELECT  
(1/2/3/4/5 sec  
)
Default  
2 seconds  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
☞
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)  
System Programming  
4-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[519]-[521]  
4.2  
System Programming  
[519] DISA OGM Mute Time  
Assigns the length of time from answering a call with the DISA feature and sending the  
DISA outgoing message or a beep. During the assigned length of time, the system will not  
receive DTMF signals.  
5
1
NEXT  
END  
9
SELECT  
STORE  
(0/2/4/6 sec)  
Default  
0 second  
• Feature Reference  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)  
1
[520] UCD Group*  
Assigns one extension group which works as the UCD group.  
extension group no.  
5
2
NEXT  
0
END  
STORE  
(1···8)  
Default  
Extension group number 1  
• Feature Reference  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)  
1
[521] UCD Busy Waiting Time*  
Assigns the length of time the system holds an incoming outside call via the UCD feature  
when all extensions in the UCD group are busy. When the programmed time expires, the  
call will be intercepted or disconnected according to program [523] “UCD Busy Mode”.  
5
NEXT  
waiting time*  
1
2
SELECT  
END  
STORE  
(min/sec)  
* Waiting time: 1 through 32 (minutes) / 1 through 59 (seconds)  
Default 10 minutes  
• Feature Reference  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)  
1
* : Required only when the optional OGM/FAX Detection  
Card is installed.  
4-66  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[522]-[523]  
1
[522] UCD OGM Message Interval Time*  
Assigns interval time between sending UCD outgoing messages to an incoming outside call  
via the UCD feature when all extensions in the UCD group are busy. The UCD outgoing  
message is repeated during the time programmed in [521] “UCD Busy Waiting Time”.  
5
2
NEXT  
2
SELECT  
END  
STORE  
(30 sec/1/  
1.5/2 min)  
Default  
1 minute  
• Feature Reference  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)  
1
[523] UCD Busy Mode*  
Selects the operation when the length of time programmed in [521] “UCD Busy Waiting  
Time” expires. Intercept or Disconnect is available.  
Intercept: The call will be redirected depending on programs [408]-[410] “Flexible  
Ringing Assignment–Day/Night/Lunch” (Intercept Routing feature). The  
extension which receives a redirected call rings during the length of time  
programmed in [526] “UCD Ringing Time after Intercept”.  
Disconnect: The call will be disconnected immediately.  
5
2
NEXT  
3
SELECT  
END  
STORE  
(Intercept/  
Disconnect)  
Default  
Intercept  
• The above-mentioned intercept only occurs when “MODE 3” or “MODE 5” is selected in  
program [502] “OGM Mode Selection”. If “MODE 4” is selected, the call will be  
disconnected after the UCD-END outgoing message. If “MODE 6” is selected and  
“Intercept” is assigned in this program, the call will go to the DISA and OGM2 will be  
heard by the caller.  
!
• Feature References  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Intercept Routing, Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)  
1
* : Required only when the optional OGM/FAX Detection  
Card is installed.  
System Programming  
4-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[524]-[526]  
4.2  
System Programming  
1
[524] UCD Intercept Mode*  
Selects the operation when all extensions in the UCD group do not answer an outside call  
via the UCD feature within the length of time programmed in [525] “UCD Ringing Time  
before Intercept”. Intercept or Disconnect is available.  
Intercept: The call is redirected depending on programs [408]-[410] “Flexible Ringing  
Assignment–Day/Night/Lunch” (Intercept Routing – No Answer feature).  
Disconnect: The call is disconnected.  
5
2
NEXT  
4
SELECT  
END  
STORE  
(Intercept/  
Disconnect)  
Default  
Intercept  
• Feature References  
Section 3, Features  
☞
Intercept Routing, Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)  
1
[525] UCD Ringing Time before Intercept*  
Assigns the length of time for the Intercept Routing – No Answer feature (☞ [524] “UCD  
Intercept Mode”, Intercept). When the time expires, the system starts to redirect the call to  
the programmed extension(s).  
5
2
NEXT  
5
SELECT  
END  
STORE  
(10/20/30/  
40/60/120 sec)  
Default  
20 seconds  
• Feature References  
Section 3, Features  
☞
Intercept Routing, Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)  
1
[526] UCD Ringing Time after Intercept*  
Assigns the length of time to call the extension(s) where a call is redirected by the Intercept  
Routing – No Answer feature (☞ [524] “UCD Intercept Mode”, Intercept) after the time  
programmed in [525] “UCD Ringing Time before Intercept” expires.  
STORE  
5
2
NEXT  
6
SELECT  
END  
(10/20/30/  
40/60/120 sec)  
Default  
20 seconds  
• Feature References  
Section 3, Features  
☞
Intercept Routing, Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)  
1
* : Required only when the optional OGM/FAX Detection  
4-68  
System Programming  
Card is installed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[600]-[603]  
[600] Extension Group Assignment  
Assigns an extension group for each extension. For example: by department or floor.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
1
2
extension port no.* extension group no.*  
NEXT  
END  
6
0
0
STORE  
(01···24/  
)
(1···8)  
To continue  
SELECT  
1
* Extension port number: 01 through 24 / (All extension ports)  
2
* Extension group number: 1 through 8  
Default  
All extension ports – Extension group 1  
• Every extension should belong to an extension group, but cannot belong to more than one  
group.  
!
• Feature References  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Extension Group, Extension Hunting  
[601]-[603] Call Barring – Class of Service Assignment —Day/Night/Lunch  
Programs a class of service (COS) in the day, night and/or lunch modes for each extension.  
There are 5 classes of service available for each extension.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
STORE  
extension port no.*  
COS no.  
NEXT  
X
6
0
END  
(01···24/  
)
(1···5 )  
(1···3)  
To continue  
SELECT  
X – Program address selection number: 1 ([601] for day) / 2 ([602] for night)/  
3 ([603] for lunch)  
* Extension port number: 01 through 24 / (All extension ports)  
Default  
All extension ports – COS-1  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Call Barring  
☞
System Programming  
4-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[604]  
4.2  
System Programming  
[604] Extension Name Setting  
Assigns a name to each extension which will be displayed when making or receiving an  
intercom call.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
STORE  
extension port no. extension name*  
NEXT  
END  
6
0
4
(01···24 )  
10 characters  
max.  
To continue  
SELECT  
* Extension name:  
Combination Table  
Pressing SELECT  
(Times)  
Keys  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
Q
A
D
G
J
2
q
a
3
Z
B
E
H
K
N
R
U
X
,
4
z
5
!
6
?
c
f
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
b
e
C
F
I
d
g
j
h
k
n
r
i
L
O
S
V
Y
:
l
M
P
m
p
t
o
s
T
u
x
’
=
@
v
y
W
w
.
+
%
;
>
)
”
$
-
&
<
(
#
#
<Example>  
— To enter “Mike”;  
1. Press 6 and then press the SELECT button once to enter “M”.  
2. Press 4 and then press the SELECT button 6 times to enter “i”.  
3. Press 5 and then press the SELECT button 4 times to enter “k”.  
4. Press 3 and then press the SELECT button 4 times to enter “e”.  
Default  
All extension ports – Not stored.  
• To erase all letters, press the CLEAR button. To erase 1 letter, press  
• Each name has a maximum of 10 characters.  
.
!
☞
• Feature References  
Section 3, Features  
Intercom Calling  
4-70  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[605]  
[605] Account Code Entry Mode  
Selects the account code input mode, Option, Forced, Verify–All or Verify–Toll (Call  
Barring), for each extension port. This feature displays the account code of the called or  
calling party on the SMDR.  
Option:  
The user can enter any account code, if needed.  
Forced:  
The user must always enter an account code. The code can be any number.  
Verify–All: The user must always enter an assigned account code in program  
[310] “Account Codes” to make an outside call.  
Verify–Toll (Call Barring): The user can enter an assigned account code in program  
[310] to override call barring. The call barring COS  
numbers 3 through 5 will be changed temporarily to the  
COS number 2. (The COS numbers 1 and 2 will not be  
changed.)  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
STORE  
extension port no.*  
NEXT  
END  
6
0
5
SELECT  
(01···24/  
)
(Option/Forced/  
Verify-All/Verify-Toll)  
To continue  
SELECT  
* Extension port number: 01 through 24 / (All extension ports)  
Default All extension ports – Option  
• Feature References  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Account Code Entry, Call Barring Override by Account Codes  
System Programming  
4-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[606]-[607]  
4.2  
System Programming  
[606] Call Transfer to an Exchange Line  
Enables or disables transferring an intercom or outside call to any exchange line manually  
for each extension.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
STORE  
extension port no.*  
END  
NEXT  
6
0
6
SELECT  
(01···24/  
)
(Enable/  
To continue  
Disable)  
SELECT  
* Extension port number: 01 through 24 / (All extension ports)  
Default All extension ports – Disable  
• Feature References  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Call Transfer – to Exchange Line, Conference (3-party)  
[607] Call Forwarding to an Exchange Line  
Enables or disables automatically forwarding an incoming intercom or outside call to any  
exchange line for each extension.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
STORE  
extension port no.*  
NEXT  
6
0
SELECT  
END  
7
(01···24/  
)
(Enable/  
To continue  
Disable)  
SELECT  
* Extension port number: 01 through 24 / (All extension ports)  
Default All extension ports – Disable  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Call Forwarding  
☞
4-72  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[608]-[609]  
[608] Executive Busy Override  
Enables or disables using the Executive Busy Override feature at each extension. If enabled,  
an extension user can interrupt an established call.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
STORE  
extension port no.*  
END  
NEXT  
6
0
8
SELECT  
(01···24/  
)
(Enable/  
To continue  
Disable)  
SELECT  
* Extension port number: 01 through 24 / (All extension ports)  
Default All extension ports – Disable  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
☞
Executive Busy Override  
[609] Do Not Disturb Override  
Enables or disables using the Do Not Disturb Override feature at each extension. If enabled,  
an extension user can ring an extension which has set the Do Not Disturb feature.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
STORE  
extension port no.*  
END  
NEXT  
6
0
9
SELECT  
(01···24/  
)
(Enable/  
Disable)  
To continue  
SELECT  
* Extension port number: 01 through 24 / (All extension ports)  
Default All extension ports – Disable  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
☞
Do Not Disturb (DND)  
System Programming  
4-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[610]-[611]  
4.2  
System Programming  
[610] Parallelled Telephone Connection  
Enables or disables a single line telephone (SLT) to be connected in parallel with a  
proprietary telephone.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
STORE  
extension port no.*  
NEXT  
6
1
SELECT  
0
END  
(01···16/  
)
(Enable/  
Disable)  
To continue  
SELECT  
* Extension port number: 01 through 16 / (All extension ports)  
Default All extension ports – Disable  
• Feature Reference  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Parallelled Telephone Connection  
[611] TAM (Telephone Answering Machine) Extension  
Assigns the port number of an extension connected to a telephone answering machine  
(TAM) to activate the Call Retrieving from TAM feature.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
STORE  
extension port no.*  
END  
6
1
1
NEXT  
SELECT  
(01···24/  
)
(Enable/  
Disable)  
To continue  
SELECT  
* Extension port number: 01 through 24 / (All extension ports)  
Default All extension ports – Disable (not connected)  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Call Pickup  
☞
4-74  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[612]-[613]  
[612] Room Monitor Assignment  
Enables or disables which extension(s) can be monitored using the Room Monitor feature.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
STORE  
extension port no.*  
END  
6
1
2
NEXT  
SELECT  
(01···16/  
)
(Enable/  
Disable) To continue  
SELECT  
* Extension port number: 01 through 16 / (All extension ports)  
Default All extension ports – Disable (Cannot be monitored.)  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Room Monitor  
☞
[613] Exchange Line Duration Time Limit Selection  
Enables or disables the time limit programmed in [212] “Exchange Line Duration Time  
Limit” for each extension.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
STORE  
extension port no.*  
END  
6
1
3
NEXT  
SELECT  
(01···24/  
)
(Enable/  
Disable)  
To continue  
SELECT  
* Extension port number: 01 through 24 / (All extension ports)  
Default All extension ports – Disable  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
☞
Limited Call Duration  
System Programming  
4-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[614]  
4.2  
System Programming  
[614] Internal Pulse Detection  
Enables or disables connecting a single line telephone (SLT) to receive pulse signals for each  
extension.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
STORE  
extension port no.*  
6
1
4
NEXT  
SELECT  
END  
(01···24/  
)
(Enable/  
Disable)  
To continue  
SELECT  
* Extension port number: 01 through 24 / (All extension ports)  
Default All extension ports – Enable  
• If you select “MODE 1” in program [207] “Recall Timing Range Selection” and “Enable”  
in this program, the system will distinguish between a pulse signal and hooking depending  
on the situation. When you select “Disable” in this program, if “1” is dialled during the  
pulse mode, the system will regard it as hooking and all other numbers will be disregarded.  
!
• Feature Reference  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Recall Button on a Single Line Telephone  
4-76  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[615]  
[615] LCD Language Assignment  
Selects the language, English, Spanish or Portuguese, shown on the LCD display of a  
proprietary telephone on an extension basis. The selected language is shown during  
operation and Proprietary Telephone Settings.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
STORE  
extension port no.*  
6
1
5
NEXT  
SELECT  
END  
(01···16/  
)
(English/Spanish  
Portuguese)  
To continue  
SELECT  
* Extension port number: 01 through 16 / (All extension ports)  
Default All extension ports — English  
• The language used for the SMDR printout is assigned in program [806] “SMDR Language  
Assignment”.  
!
☞
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Language Selection  
System Programming  
4-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[700]-[702]  
4.2  
System Programming  
[700]-[702] Doorphone Ringing Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch  
Enables or disables receiving a call from up to 4 doorphones in the day, night and/or lunch  
modes for each extension.  
or  
PREV  
To continue  
NEXT  
Go to next or prev. doorphone number  
or  
To continue  
Go to next or prev.  
port number  
1
extension  
port no.*  
(01···24/  
doorphone no.*  
X
7
NEXT  
SELECT STORE  
END  
#
2
(1···4/  
)
(00···02)  
(Enable/  
Disable)  
)
To continue  
Go to another port number  
To continue  
SELECT  
Go to another doorphone number  
X – Program address selection number: 00 ([700] for day) / 01 ([701] for night) /  
02 ([702] for lunch)  
* Doorphone number: 1 through 4 / (All doorphones)  
* Extension port number: 01 through 24 / (All extension ports)  
1
2
Default  
All doorphones – all extension ports – Enable  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Doorphone Call  
☞
4-78  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[703]-[705]  
[703]-[705] Door Opener Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch  
Enables or disables accessing to up to 4 door openers in the day, night and/or lunch modes  
for each extension.  
or  
PREV  
To continue  
NEXT  
Go to next or prev. door opener number  
or  
To continue  
Go to next or prev.  
port number  
1
extension  
port no.*  
(01···24/  
door opener no.*  
X
7
NEXT  
SELECT STORE  
END  
#
2
(1···4/  
)
(03···05)  
(Enable/  
Disable)  
)
To continue  
Go to another port number  
To continue  
SELECT  
Go to another door opener number  
X – Program address selection number: 03 ([703] for day) / 04 ([704] for night) /  
05 ([705] for lunch)  
* Door opener number: 1 through 4 / (All door openers)  
* Extension port number: 01 through 24 / (All extension ports)  
1
2
Default  
All door openers – all extension ports – Disable  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Door Opener  
☞
System Programming  
4-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[706]-[707]  
4.2  
System Programming  
[706] Doorphone Ringing / Tone Pattern Selection  
Selects the doorphone ringing pattern, Single, Double, Triple or S-Double.  
1 s  
Single:  
Double:  
Triple:  
S-Double:  
doorphone no.*  
NEXT  
SELECT  
STORE  
END  
7
0
6
(1···4/  
)
(Single/Double/  
Triple/S-Double)  
To continue  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
* Doorphone number: 1 through 4 / (All doorphones)  
Default All doorphones – Triple  
• When a doorphone call is received at a proprietary telephone, a tone is heard instead of  
ringing.  
!
• Feature References  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Doorphone Call, Ringing Pattern Selection  
[707] Doorphone Access Tone Selection  
Enables or disables sending a doorphone access tone to a monitored doorphone. If enabled,  
the access tone is heard from the doorphone when monitoring from a telephone starts.  
doorphone no.*  
END  
7
0
7
SELECT  
STORE  
NEXT  
(1···4/  
)
(Enable/  
Disable)  
To continue  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
* Doorphone number: 1 through 4 / (All doorphones)  
Default All doorphones – Enable  
• Feature References  
Section 3, Features  
☞
Doorphone Call, Room Monitor  
4-80  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[708]-[709]  
[708] Doorphone Ringing Time  
Sets the ringing time when making an intercom call from a doorphone.  
doorphone no.*  
END  
7
0
8
NEXT  
STORE  
SELECT  
(1···4/  
)
(15/30 sec)  
To continue  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
* Doorphone number: 1 through 4 / (All doorphones)  
Default All doorphones – 15 seconds  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Doorphone Call  
☞
[709] Door Opener Time  
Assigns the length of the door opener time. The door is unlocked for the assigned period of  
time.  
door opener no.*  
END  
STORE  
7
0
9
NEXT  
SELECT  
(1···4/  
)
(1/2/3/4/5/  
6/7/8 sec)  
To continue  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
* Door opener number: 1 through 4 / (All door openers)  
Default All door openers – 5 seconds  
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Door Opener  
☞
System Programming  
4-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[800]  
4.2  
System Programming  
[800] SMDR RS-232C Communication Parameters  
Assigns the communication parameters for the Serial Interface (RS-232C).  
NL–Code:  
Selects the code for your printer or personal computer. If your printer or  
personal computer automatically feeds lines with a carriage return, select  
“CR”. If not, select “CR+LF”.  
(New line)  
Baud Rate:  
The baud rate code indicates the data transmission speed from the system  
to the printer or personal computer.  
Word Length: The word length code indicates how many bits compose a character.  
Parity:  
The parity code indicates what type of parity is used to detect an error in  
the string of bits composing a character. Make your selection depending  
on the requirements of your printer or personal computer.  
The stop bit code indicates the end of a bit string which composes a  
character. Select a value depending on the requirements of your printer  
or personal computer.  
Stop Bit:  
< Sets the new line code>  
< Sets the baud rate >  
STORE  
SELECT  
NEXT  
SELECT  
STORE  
8
0
0
NEXT  
1
(150/300/600/  
1200/2400/  
(CR+LF/CR)*  
4800/9600 B)  
< Sets the word length >  
< Sets the parity >  
< Sets the stop bit length >  
STORE  
STORE  
STORE  
END  
NEXT  
SELECT  
NEXT  
SELECT  
NEXT  
SELECT  
(7/8 bits)  
(1 bit/2 bits)  
(Mark/Space/  
Even/Odd/  
2
None* )  
1
* CR+LF (Carriage Return + Line Feed) / CR (Carriage Return)  
2
* Select “None” when the error checking function is not required from the printer.  
Default  
New line Baud rate Word length  
CR + LF 9600 baud 8 bits  
Parity  
Mark  
Stop bit length  
1 bit  
PREV  
NEXT  
• To return to the previous mode, press  
• The following combinations are invalid.  
instead of  
.
!
Parity  
Word length Stop bit length  
Mark  
Space  
Space  
8
8
8
2
1
2
If any of the above invalid combinations are selected, an alarm tone is heard.  
• Feature Reference  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)  
4-82  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[801]-[802]  
[801] SMDR Parameter  
Assigns the following 2 printing parameters to match the SMDR output with the paper size  
used in the printer.  
Page Length: Sets the number of lines per page.  
Skip Perf:  
Sets the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page.  
(Perforation)  
< Sets the page length >  
page length  
8
0
1
NEXT  
STORE  
(4···99)  
< Sets the skip perforation >  
skip perforation  
END  
STORE  
NEXT  
(0···95)  
<Example>  
Default  
Page length – 66 lines  
Skip perforation – 0 line  
Standard paper  
for the SMDR  
(11 inches)  
• The page length should be at least 4 lines  
longer than the skip perforation length.  
page  
length  
!
66 lines  
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR  
button and enter the new one.  
skip  
perforation  
• Feature Reference  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)  
machine  
perforation  
[802] Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for Printing  
Determines which calls will produce an SMDR printout.  
< Sets an outgoing call >  
< Sets an incoming call >  
SELECT  
NEXT  
SELECT  
STORE  
8
0
2
NEXT  
STORE  
END  
2
1
(On/Off)*  
(On/Off/Toll)*  
1
* Outgoing: On (Print all calls) / Off (No printing) / Toll (Print toll calls only)  
2
* Incoming: On (Print all calls) / Off (No printing)  
Default  
Outgoing calls / Incoming calls – On  
• If “Outgoing; Toll” is selected, only calls which are checked in programs [302]–[305] “Call  
Barring – Classes 2 through 5 Denied Codes” and are allowed, are printed out.  
!
☞
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)  
System Programming  
4-83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[803]-[804]  
4.2  
System Programming  
[803] Secret Speed Dialling / One-Touch Dialling Printing  
Selects to print or not print (on SMDR) secret dialling numbers stored in program [001]  
“System Speed Dialling Entry” and/or stored in One-Touch Dialling even though they are  
not displayed on the LCD.  
SELECT  
END  
STORE  
8
0
NEXT  
3
(No Printing/  
Printing)  
Default  
No printing  
• Feature References  
Section 3, Features  
☞
Secret Dialling, Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)  
[804] System Data Dump  
Starts and stops printing the assigned data. All or a specific area of current system-  
programmed data is printed out. The areas are as follows.  
All Para: Prints out all data.  
System Para: Prints out all data except for the following 4 parameters.  
CO Para:  
Ext Para:  
Prints out programs [400] through [403] and [405] through [424].  
If the extension is a proprietary telephone, programs [102], [516] [600]  
through [613] and [615] will be printed out. The assigned data on the PF  
(Programmable Feature) buttons and line keys will also be printed out.  
If the extension is a single line telephone, programs [102], [516] and [600]  
through [614] will be printed out. The assigned Personal Speed Dialling  
numbers are also printed out.  
DSS Para: Prints out the assigned data in the DSS buttons and PF buttons on the DSS  
console.  
Speed Dial: Prints out the System Speed Dialling numbers and names assigned in  
programs [001] and [011].  
Stop Output : Stops printing.  
< To select All parameters, System parameter,  
Speed dial and/or Stop output. >  
END  
STORE  
8
0
4
NEXT  
SELECT  
(All/System/CO/Ext/  
DSS Para/Speed Dial/  
Stop Output)  
To continue  
4-84  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[804]-[805]  
< To select the CO (exchange line) parameter. >  
exchange line  
END  
END  
END  
STORE  
NEXT  
8
0
4
SELECT  
STORE  
(1···6/  
)
(All/System/CO/Ext/  
DSS Para/Speed Dial/  
Stop Output)  
To continue  
< To select the Extension parameter. >  
2
extension port no.* STORE  
NEXT  
8
0
4
SELECT  
STORE  
(01···24/  
)
(All/System/CO/Ext/  
DSS Para/Speed Dial/  
Stop Output)  
To continue  
< To select the DSS parameter. >  
3
STORE  
DSS console no.*  
8
0
4
NEXT  
(All/System/CO/Ext/  
SELECT  
STORE  
(1···2/ )  
DSS Para/Speed Dial/  
To continue  
Stop Output)  
1
* Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)  
2
* Extension port number: 01 through 24 / (All extension ports)  
3
* DSS console number: 1 through 2 / (Both DSS console numbers)  
• This program and [999] “System Data Clear” are not included.  
!
☞
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)  
[805] SMDR Account Code Selection  
Selects printing out the account code stored in program [310] “Account Codes”, or just the  
index of the account code on SMDR printout.  
SELECT  
END  
STORE  
8
0
5
NEXT  
(CODE/  
INDEX)  
Default  
CODE  
• The printing of the index of the account code only occurs if the extension user entered their  
account code in the “Verify-All” or “Verify-Toll (Call Barring)” input mode as programmed  
in [605] “Account Code Entry Mode”.  
!
• Feature References  
☞
Section 3, Features  
Account Code Entry, Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)  
System Programming  
4-85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[806], [998]  
4.2  
System Programming  
[806] SMDR Language Assignment  
Selects the language, English, Spanish or Portuguese, used for an SMDR printout.  
8
0
6
NEXT  
SELECT  
STORE  
END  
(English/Spanish  
Portuguese)  
Default  
English  
• Feature References  
Section 3, Features  
☞
Language Selection, Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)  
[998] ROM Version  
Confirms the system ROM version.  
END  
9
9
8
NEXT  
Display example:  
Y551JA 990620 (E)  
Version  
Date  
4-86  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2  
System Programming  
[999]  
[999] System Data Clear  
Resets all or a specific area of the current assigned data to the default settings. The areas are  
as follows.  
All Para :  
Resets all data to the default settings.  
System Para: Resets all data to the default settings except for the data of the following  
4 parameters.  
CO Para:  
Ext Para:  
DSS Para:  
Resets programs [400] through [403] and [405] through [424] to the  
default settings on an exchange line basis.  
Resets programs [102], [516] and [600] through [615] to the default  
settings on an extension basis.  
Resets the assigned data on the DSS buttons and PF buttons on the DSS  
console.  
Speed Dial : Resets the System Speed Dialling numbers (00 through 99) assigned in  
program [001].  
< To select All, System parameter and/or Speed Dial. >  
END  
STORE  
9
9
9
NEXT  
SELECT  
(All/System/CO/Ext/  
DSS Para/Speed Dial)  
To continue  
< To select the CO (exchange line) parameter. >  
1
exchange line no.*  
END  
STORE  
9
9
9
NEXT  
SELECT  
STORE  
(1···6/  
)
(All/System/CO/Ext/  
DSS Para/Speed Dial)  
To continue  
< To select the Extension parameter. >  
2
extension port no.*  
END  
STORE  
9
9
9
NEXT  
STORE  
SELECT  
(01···24/  
)
(All/System/CO/Ext/  
DSS Para/Speed Dial)  
To continue  
< To select the DSS parameter. >  
3
9
9
9
NEXT  
(All/System/CO/Ext/  
END  
SELECT  
STORE  
STORE  
DSS console no.*  
(1···2/ )  
DSS Para/Speed Dial)  
To continue  
1
* Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)  
2
* Extension port number: 01 through 24 / (All extension ports)  
3
* DSS console number: 1 through 2 / (Both DSS console numbers)  
• This program and [804] “System Data Dump” are not included.  
!
• Feature Reference  
Section 3, Features  
☞
System Data Default Set  
System Programming  
4-87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-88  
System Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.1  
Default Values  
Address  
Program  
Default  
[000] Date and Time Setting  
[001] System Speed Dialling Entry  
[002] System Password  
’98 Jan. 1 Thu 12:00 AM  
All speed dialling numbers – Not stored  
1234  
[003] DSS Console Port Assignment  
All DSS Consoles — Disable  
DSS1 – Disable, DSS2 – Disable  
[004] Paired Telephone Assignment for DSS  
Console  
[005] One-Touch Transfer Using a DSS Button  
With Transfer  
Manual  
[006] Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Changing  
Mode  
[007] Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Start Time Every day of the week  
— Day – 9:00 AM / Night – 5:30 PM /  
Lunch-S – None / Lunch-E – None  
[008] Operator Assignment  
Jack-01  
[009] Extension Number Assignment  
[010] LCD Time Display Selection  
[011] System Speed Dialling Name Setting  
[012] Alternative Feature Numbering Plan  
[100] Hunting Group Set  
Port 01 through 24 = Extn. 201 through 224  
12 HOUR  
All System Speed Dialling numbers – Not stored  
All codes — Not stored  
All extension groups — Disable  
[101] Hunting Type  
All extension groups – Terminate  
[102] Voice Mail Port for KX-TVP100  
[103] DTMF Integration for KX-TVP100  
[104] Hold Mode Selection  
All 4 extension ports — Disable  
Disable  
Hold-1  
[105] Conference Tone  
Enable  
[106] External Paging Access Tone  
[107] DTMF Receiver Check  
Enable  
All DTMF receivers — Enable  
[108] Recall Mode for a Locked Extension  
[109] CO Indicator Assignment  
[110] Recall Key Mode  
Disable  
Enable  
MODE 1  
External  
Enable  
[111] Hold Music Selection  
[112] DSS Console Indication Mode  
[115] Extension Ringing Pattern Selection  
[116] Conference Pattern Selection  
[117] Call Pickup Tone  
Single  
5-party C-2 E-5  
Enable  
5-2  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.1  
Default Values  
Address  
Program  
Default  
[118] Pulse Restriction  
Enable  
Disable  
25 Hz  
[119] Redialling after Pulse to Tone Conversion  
[120] Bell Frequency  
[121] Automatic Exchange Line Access Number  
Selection  
Dial 9  
[122] Automatic Rotation for Exchange Line  
Access  
Disable  
[123] Break Ratio  
MODE 1  
MODE 2  
Enable  
[124] SLT Ringing Mode Selection  
[125] Call Barring Check for  
[126] DSS Off-Hook Mode  
[127] Pickup Group Set  
and #  
Enable  
All extension groups – Disable  
30 seconds  
[200] Hold Recall Time  
[201] Transfer Recall Time  
[202] Call Forwarding Start Time  
[203] Pickup Dial Delay Time  
30 seconds  
15 seconds delay  
3 seconds  
[204] Call Duration Count Start Time  
[206] Dialling Start Time  
10 seconds after dialling  
0 millisecond  
MODE 1  
[207] Recall Timing Range Selection  
[208] Interdigit Time  
20 seconds  
[210] DTMF Time  
MODE 1  
[211] No Dial Disconnection  
[212] Exchange Line Duration Time Limit  
[213] Bell Off Detection  
Enable  
10 minutes  
3 seconds  
[300] Carrier Excepted Code Assignment  
All codes – Not stored  
Boundary Class-1  
[301] Call Barring — System Speed Dialling  
Boundary Class  
[302]–[305] Call Barring — Classes 2 through 5 All codes – Not stored  
Denied Codes  
[306] Call Barring — Exception Codes  
[309] Emergency Dial Number Set  
[310] Account Codes  
All codes – Not stored  
Code-01 = 999, Code-02 = 112, Other codes = Not stored  
All codes – Not stored  
[311] Automatic Pause Insertion Codes  
All codes – Not stored  
Appendix  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.1  
Default Values  
Address  
Program  
Default  
[312] Call Barring — Extension Lock Boundary Class Disable  
[350] ARS Selection  
All exchange lines – Disable  
[351]-[354] Routes 1 through 4 Selection Codes All codes – Not stored  
(Leading Digits)  
[355]-[358] Routes 1 through 4 Exception Codes All codes – Not stored  
[359] 1st Carrier Selection Code  
(BT Line Access Code)  
121 (British Telecom Line access code)  
[360] ARS Modification — Removed Digits  
[361] ARS Modification — Added Number  
[362] ARS Dial Tone Pattern Selection  
[363] ARS Interdigit Time  
All routes – 0 (No deletion)  
Route 1 = 131, Other routes = Not stored  
Tone 1  
5 seconds  
[364] ARS Trunk Grorup  
All routes –  
(All trunk (TRK) groups)  
[381]-[384] Routes 1 through 4 Authorisation  
Codes  
All exchange lines – Not stored  
[385]-[388] Routes 1 through 4 Itemised Bill  
[389] Itemised Bill Code Assignment  
[400] Exchange Line Connection Assignment  
[401] Dial Mode  
All exchange lines – Disable  
Extension ports 01 through 24 – 201 through 224  
All exchange lines – Connect  
All exchange lines – DTMF Mode  
All exchange lines – Low Speed  
All exchange lines – Not stored  
[402] Pulse Speed Selection  
[403] Host PBX Access Codes  
[404] Trunk Group Assignment  
CO1 — TRK GRP-1; CO2 — TRK GRP-2;  
CO3 — TRK GRP-3; CO4 — TRK GRP-4;  
CO5 — TRK GRP-5; CO6 — TRK GRP-6;  
[405]–[407] Flexible Outward Dialling  
Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch  
All exchange lines – all extension ports – Enable  
— Day/Night/Lunch  
[408]–[410] Flexible Ringing Assignment  
— Day/Night/Lunch  
All exchange lines – all extension ports – Enable  
— Day/Night/Lunch  
[411]–[413] Delayed Ringing Assignment  
— Day/Night/Lunch  
All exchange lines – all extension ports – Immdtly  
— Day/Night/Lunch  
[414]–[416] Exchange Line Mode  
— Day/Night/Lunch  
All exchange lines — Normal  
— Day/Night/Lunch  
[417] Pause Time  
[418] Recall Time  
All exchange lines — 1.5 seconds  
All exchange lines – 100 milliseconds  
[419] Automatic Designated Exchange Line Access All exchange lines — Enable  
5-4  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.1  
Default Values  
Address  
Program  
Default  
All exchange lines – 00 (Disable)  
All exchange lines – Disable  
All exchange lines – 2.0 seconds  
All exchange lines – Double  
All exchange lines – Disable  
Without AA  
[420] Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal  
[421] CPC Detection for Outgoing Calls  
[422] Disconnect Time  
[423] Exchange Line Ringing Pattern Selection  
[424] Reverse (Polarity) Circuit Assignment  
[500] DISA Incoming Dialling Mode Selection  
[501] DISA Built-in Auto Attendant  
[502] OGM Mode Selection  
All numbers — Not Stored  
MODE 1  
[503] FAX Connection  
Disable  
[504] DISA Delayed Answer Time  
[505] DISA Waiting Time after OGM  
[506] DISA Busy Mode  
3 seconds  
5 seconds  
Disconnect  
[507] DISA Intercept Mode  
Intercept  
[508] DISA Ringing Time before Intercept  
[509] DISA Ringing Time after Intercept  
[510] DISA No Dial Mode  
20 seconds  
20 seconds  
DISA1 and DISA2 — Intercept  
4 Times  
[513] Cyclic Tone Detection  
[514] Fax Tone Detection  
1 Time  
[515] Intercept Time for Internal DISA  
[516] DISA Incoming Assignment  
[517] DISA AA Wait Time  
3 seconds  
All extension ports — Enable  
2 seconds  
[519] DISA OGM Mute Time  
0 second  
[520] UCD Group  
Group – 1  
[521] UCD Busy Waiting Time  
[522] UCD OGM Message Interval Time  
[523] UCD Busy Mode  
10 minutes  
1 minute  
Intercept  
[524] UCD Intercept Mode  
Intercept  
[525] UCD Ringing Time before Intercept  
[526] UCD Ringing Time after Intercept  
[600] Extension Group Assignment  
20 seconds  
20 seconds  
All extension ports — EXT GRP-1  
[601]–[603] Call Barring – Class of Service  
Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch  
All extension ports — COS-1  
— Day/Night/Lunch  
Appendix  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.1  
Default Values  
Address  
Program  
Default  
All extension ports – Not stored  
All extension ports – Option  
All extension ports – Disable  
All extension ports – Disable  
All extension ports – Disable  
All extension ports – Disable  
All extension ports – Disable  
All extension ports – Disable  
[604] Extension Name Setting  
[605] Account Code Entry Mode  
[606] Call Transfer to an Exchange Line  
[607] Call Forwarding to an Exchange Line  
[608] Executive Busy Override  
[609] Do Not Disturb Override  
[610] Parallelled Telephone Connection  
[611] TAM (Telephone Answering Machine)  
Extension  
[612] Room Monitor Assignment  
All extension ports – Disable  
All extension ports – Disable  
[613] Exchange Line Duration Time Limit  
Selection  
[614] Internal Pulse Detection  
All extension ports – Enable  
All extension ports – English  
[615] LCD Language Assignment  
[700]–[702] Doorphone Ringing Assignment  
— Day/Night/Lunch  
All doorphones — all extension ports – Enable  
— Day/Night/Lunch  
[703]–[705] Door Opener Assignment  
— Day/Night/Lunch  
All door openers – all extension ports – Disable  
— Day/Night/Lunch  
[706] Doorphone Ringing/Tone Pattern Selection  
[707] Doorphone Access Tone Selection  
[708] Doorphone Ringing Time  
All doorphones — Triple  
All doorphones — Enable  
All doorphones — 15 seconds  
All door openers — 5 seconds  
[709] Door Opener Time  
[800] SMDR RS-232C Communication Parameters New line code = CR+LF; Baud rate = 9600;  
Word length = 8; Parity = Mark; Stop bit = 1  
[801] SMDR Parameter  
Page length – 66; Skip perforation – 0  
Outgoing calls – On; Incoming calls – On  
[802] Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for  
Printing  
[803] Secret Speed Dialling/One Touch Dialling  
Printing  
No printing  
[805] SMDR Account Code Selection  
[806] SMDR Language Assignment  
CODE  
English  
5-6  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.2  
Specifications  
System Capacity  
Exchange Lines: 3 max. (6 max. with 3-CO Line & 8 Ext Expansion  
Card)  
Extensions  
: 8 max. (24 max. with 3-CO Line & 8 Ext Expansion  
Card and 8 SLT Extension Expansion Card)  
Control Method  
CPU: 16 bit CPU  
Control ROM: 4 Mbit, Control RAM: 1 Mbit  
Switching  
Space Division CMOS Crosspoint Switch  
Power Supplies  
Primary: 230 V AC – 240 V AC, 50 Hz (0.5 A)  
Secondary: Circuit Volt (+5 V, +26 V)  
Dialling  
Dial Pulse (DP):10 pps, 20 pps  
Tone (DTMF) Dialling, DTMF–DP  
Intercom Paths  
Connector  
4
Exchange Lines  
: 2-pin Modular Connector (RJ11)  
Extensions/Doorphone: 4-pin Modular Connector  
Pager/Music Source : EIAJ RC-6701 A plug (two-conductor, ø 3.5 mm  
in diameter)  
Extension Connection Cable  
KX-T7020 / KX-T7130 / KX-T7050 . . . . . . .2 pair wire (A, B, H, L)  
Single Line Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 pair wire (A, B)  
SMDR (Station Message Detail Interface  
: Serial Interface (RS-232C) (D-SUB, 9-pin)  
Recording)  
Output Equipment: Printer  
Detail Recording : Date, Time, Extension Number, Exchange Line  
Number, Dialled Number, Call Duration, Account  
Code  
Extension Loop Limit  
KX-T7020 / KX-T7130 / KX-T7050 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Ω  
Single Line Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600 Ω including set  
Doorphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Ω  
Minimum Leakage Resistance  
15 000 Ω  
Maximum Number of Extension 1 for a KX-T7020 / KX-T7130 / KX-T7050 or single line telephone  
Instruments per Line  
2 for by parallel connection of a proprietary telephone and a single line  
telephone  
Ring Voltage  
80 Vrms at 25 Hz depending on the Ringing Load  
1 600 Ω max.  
Local Exchange Loop Limit  
Environmental Requirements  
Recall Timing Range  
0 ˚C – 40 ˚C, 10 % – 90% relative humidity  
80 ms – 1 000 ms  
Ability To Recognise Further  
Digits  
The KX-TA624 is capable of accepting and acting upon routing  
information received from a proprietary telephone for 10 seconds, after  
the latest routing information has been received.  
(Satisfies BS6450:Part 1 1993 Clause 13.5.)  
Appendix  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.2  
Specifications  
Maximum associated cable loss PT: Max cable loss 0.34 dB (140 m max for ø 0.5 mm)  
for EXTN. port  
SLT:Max cable loss 0.87 dB (698 m max for ø 0.5 mm)  
Port to port loss  
Loss across switch, PAS →1AS Loss=1.13 dB (Not through–fed system)  
Send and receive loudness  
ratings on port to port basis  
Send loudness rating (1AS →PAS) : +3dB (0km)  
Receive loudness rating (PAS →1AS) : -6 dB (0km)  
Extension (1AS) port  
3 ringers can be supported with extension wiring up to 698 m.  
Notes  
• Extension ports 01 through 24 may be used for off premise extensions in which  
case cabling would be required by BS 6701:Part 1 1986 to be equipped with  
over voltage protection.  
• When using separately approved extension telephones, the best overall  
performance of the PBX system will be obtained by using extension telephones  
of impedance class A clause 4.3.2.1. of BS 6305:1982.  
Port Type Classification  
Port Name  
Brief Description  
Connect to PT, SLT  
Connect to Network  
External Paging  
Port Type  
Extn. Port**  
1 AS  
PAS  
4F  
PSTN Port**  
Paging Port (output)*  
Ext. Music Port (input)*  
Doorphone Port*  
Door Opener Port  
EIA (RS-232C) Port  
External Music  
4F  
Connect to KX-T30865  
Door Opener  
4E  
4F  
Connect to PC, Printer  
4E  
* These ports do not respond to address signalling.  
** These ports provide DTMF and Loop Disconnect Signalling.  
Port Types between which Call Paths can be established  
Ext.  
Door-  
Door  
EIA  
To  
Extn.  
PSTN Paging  
Music Phone Opener (RS-232C)  
From  
Extn.  
A
A
X
A
A
X
X
A
A
X
A
X
X
X
A
X
X
A
X
X
X
X
X
A
X
X
X
X
X
PSTN  
X
X
X
X
Paging  
N/A  
X
X
X
X
Ext. Music  
Doorphone  
Door Opener  
EIA (RS-232C)  
N/A  
X
X
X
X
N/A  
X
X
X
X
N/A  
A: Allowed X: Not allowed N/A: Not applicable.  
5-8  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.2  
Specifications  
Lines, Cards, Extension Equipment  
Item  
Max. Quantity  
Service Units  
1
Exchange lines  
6
24  
40  
1
Extension ports  
Extension Terminals  
3-CO Line and 8 Ext Expansion Card  
8 SLT Extension Expansion Card  
OGM/FAX Detection Card  
Doorphone/Door Opener Card  
Doorphones  
1
1
1
4
Door Openers  
4
External Pager  
1
External Music Source  
DSS Consoles  
1
2
System Data  
Item  
Max. Quantity  
Operator  
1
System Speed Dialling  
One Touch Dialling  
100  
24 per extension  
(Proprietary telephone)  
Personal Speed Dialling  
Call Park areas  
10 per extension  
10  
Absent Messages  
Call Barring Classes  
Extension Groups  
Message Waitings  
6
5
8
8 per extension  
Appendix  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-10  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 6  
Troubleshooting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.1  
While Installing  
PROBLEM  
PROBABLE CAUSE  
POSSIBLE SOLUTION  
Extension does not  
operate.  
Something is wrong with  
the printed circuit board  
(Extension Card).  
Exchange the printed circuit board  
with another printed circuit board.  
Something is wrong with  
Take the extension and plug it into  
the connection between the the same extension port using a  
system and extension.  
short telephone cord. If the  
telephone works correctly, the  
connection between the system and  
the extension must be repaired.  
A telephone with an A-A1 Use a 2 wire cord.  
relay is connected.  
Set the A-A1 relay switch on the  
telephone to the “OUT” or “OFF”  
position.  
Something is wrong with  
the extension.  
Take the extension and plug it into  
another extension port that is  
working. If the telephone does not  
work, replace the phone.  
Improper reset operation.  
Turn the Power Switch “OFF” and  
then “ON”.  
Noise during external  
paging.  
Induced noise on the wire  
between the system and the connection wire between the  
Use a shielded cable as the  
amplifier.  
system and amplifier. A short  
shielded cable is recommended.  
Volume distortion from  
external music source.  
Excessive input level from Decrease the output level of the  
external music source.  
external music source by using the  
volume control on the music  
source.  
Speed Dialling or  
One-Touch Dialling does  
not function.  
Wrong programming.  
Enter an exchange line access  
number (9 or 0, 81 through 86) in  
programming.  
A proprietary telephone  
An extension (H, L) port 01 Turn the Power Switch “OFF”.  
connected to extension ports through 08, 09 through 16, Fix the shorted part, then turn the  
01 through 08, 09 through  
16, or 17 through 24 does  
not operate, but a single line  
telephone operates.  
or 17 through 24 may have Power Switch “ON”.  
been shorted.  
6-2  
Troubleshooting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.2  
While Connecting  
Connection between the system and a proprietary telephone:  
CAUSE  
SOLUTION  
A/B is connected to H/L.  
Use the correct cord  
(the inner 2 wires are for A/B  
and the outer 2 wires are for  
H/L).  
H •  
A •  
B •  
L •  
• H  
• A  
• B  
• L  
No  
Can you dial an  
extension?  
KX-TA624  
Extension  
Connection between the system and a single line telephone:  
CAUSE  
SOLUTION  
A/B is connected to H/L.  
Use the correct cord  
(the inner 2 wires are for  
A/B).  
H •  
A •  
B •  
L •  
•
• A  
• B  
•
KX-TA624  
Extension  
Connection between the system and a single line telephone that is polarity-  
sensitive:  
Yes  
CAUSE  
SOLUTION  
“A” is connected to “B”.  
Reverse the connections of  
A/B.  
H •  
A •  
B •  
L •  
•
• A  
• B  
•
KX-TA624  
Extension  
Connection between the Local Exchange and the system:  
CAUSE  
SOLUTION  
Exchange lines are connected to H/L.  
Reconnect the exchange lines  
to A/B using 2-conductor  
wiring.  
Can you dial  
out using an  
exchange line?  
•
No  
•
•
• A  
• B  
•
Exchange line  
KX-TA624  
Troubleshooting  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.3  
While Operating  
PROBLEM  
PROBABLE CAUSE  
POSSIBLE SOLUTION  
When using the  
The HANDSET/HEADSET Set the HANDSET/HEADSET selector  
speakerphone with a  
proprietary telephone,  
KX-T7130, nothing is  
heard.  
selector on the KX-T7130  
is set to the “HEADSET”  
position.  
to the “HANDSET” position.  
The unit does not ring.  
The Ringer Volume  
Set to “HIGH” or “LOW”.  
Selector is set to “OFF”.  
During a power failure, A proprietary telephone is  
the extension connected connected to the port.  
to port number 01 or 09  
Disconnect the proprietary telephone  
and connect a single line telephone.  
does not operate.  
Making an outside call  
cannot be performed.  
The corresponding line key Program the line key. See the Flexible  
does not exist on the  
proprietary telephone.  
Button Assignment.  
(☞ Operating Instructions,  
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings,  
“Customising the Buttons on Your  
Telephone”)  
A tone type single line  
telephone (SLT) user  
cannot make a call.  
There may be something  
wrong with a DTMF  
receiver.  
1. Select “Enable” for DTMF receiver 1  
and “Disable” for DTMF receiver 2 in  
program [107].  
2. Make a call using a tone type SLT  
connected to one of extension ports  
01–08.  
3. If you cannot make the call, the  
problem may have been caused by  
DTMF receiver 1. If the call can be  
made, go to step 4.  
4. Try DTMF receiver 2. Select  
“Disable” for DTMF receiver 1 and  
“Enable” for DTMF receiver 2 in  
program [107], and make another call.  
If you cannot make the call, the  
problem may have been caused by  
DTMF receiver 2. If the call can be  
made, go to step 5.  
5. Check the other 4 DTMF receivers in  
the same way. Refer to program  
[107].  
6-4  
Troubleshooting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7  
Programming Tables  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[000] Date and Time Setting  
Year  
(00 – 99) (Jan. – Dec.) (1 – 31)  
’98 Jan.  
Month  
Day  
Day of the week Hour  
Minute  
(1 – 12) (00 – 59)  
12 00  
AM / PM  
AM  
(Sun – Sat)  
Thu  
Default  
Change  
1
[002] System Password  
Default  
Parameter: 4 digits, 0 – 9  
1
2
3
4
[003]  
[004]  
Paired Telephone Assignment for DSS Console  
DSS Console Port Assignment  
…
…
Selection  
Default  
DSS 1  
DSS console port no. (02 16) / Disable  
All: Disable  
Paired telephone port no. (01 16) / Disable  
DSS 1 – Disable / DSS 2 – Disable  
DSS 2  
[005] One-Touch Transfer Using a DSS Button  
[006] Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Changing Mode  
Default  
Selection  
Default  
Selection  
With Transfer  
✓
Manually  
✓
Without Transfer  
Automatically  
[007] Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Start Time  
Default  
Change  
Every day Every day  
9:00 AM  
Sun.  
Mon.  
Tue.  
Wed.  
Thu.  
Fri.  
Sat.  
Day  
Night  
5:30 PM  
Lunch-S  
Lunch-E  
None  
None  
[008] Operator Assignment  
[010] LCD Time Display Selection  
Default  
Port no.  
Default  
Selection  
Operator  
Jack-01  
12 HOUR  
24 HOUR  
✓
7-2  
Programming Tables  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[001] System Speed Dialling Entry  
[011] System Speed Dialling Name Setting  
SPD no.  
Telephone number (32 digits max.)  
Name (16 characters max.)  
Default  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
All: Not stored  
(Continued)  
Programming Tables  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[001] System Speed Dialling Entry  
[011] System Speed Dialling Name Setting  
SPD no.  
Telephone number (32 digits max.)  
Name (16 characters max.)  
Default  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
All: Not stored  
(Continued)  
7-4  
Programming Tables  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[001] System Speed Dialling Entry  
[011] System Speed Dialling Name Setting  
SPD no.  
Telephone number (32 digits max.)  
Name (16 characters max.)  
Default  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
97  
98  
99  
All: Not stored  
Programming Tables  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[009] Extension Number Assignment  
Plan 2  
Selection  
Default  
Change  
Plan 1  
Plan 3  
✓
…
…
…
Extension no. (200 299)  
Change  
Extension no. (100 499)  
Change  
Extension no. (10 49)  
Change  
Extension  
jack no.  
Default  
201  
202  
203  
204  
205  
206  
207  
208  
209  
210  
211  
212  
213  
214  
215  
216  
217  
218  
219  
220  
221  
222  
223  
224  
Default  
201  
202  
203  
204  
205  
206  
207  
208  
209  
210  
211  
212  
213  
214  
215  
216  
217  
218  
219  
220  
221  
222  
223  
224  
Default  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
[012] Alternative Feature Numbering Plan  
CODE no.  
Feature no. (10 digits max.)  
CODE no.  
Feature no. (10 digits max.)  
Default: All  
Not stored  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
7-6  
Programming Tables  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[100] Hunting Group Set  
…
Default  
All  
Extension group no. (1 8, : all)  
Selection  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Disable  
Enable  
✓
[101] Hunting Type  
Extension group no. (1 8, : all)  
…
Default  
All  
Selection  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Terminate  
Circular  
✓
[102] Voice Mail Port for KX-TVP100  
Default Extn. port no. (07, 08, 15, 16, : all) Default  
[107] DTMF Receiver Check  
…
DTMF receiver no. (1 6)  
Selection  
All  
07  
08  
15  
16  
All  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Disable  
Enable  
✓
✓
[103] DTMF  
Integration for  
KX-TVP100  
[104]  
Hold Mode Selection  
[105]  
Conference Tone  
[106] External  
Paging Access Tone  
Selection  
Default  
Change  
Enable  
Disable Hold-1 Hold-2 Hold-3  
Enable  
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
✓
✓
✓
✓
[108] Recall Mode for a  
Locked Extension  
[109] CO Indicator  
Assignment  
[110]  
Recall Key Mode  
Selection  
Default  
Change  
Enable  
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
MODE 1 MODE 2  
✓
✓
✓
[111]  
Hold Music Selection  
[112] DSS Console  
Indication Mode  
Selection  
Default  
Change  
External  
Tone  
Enable  
Disable  
✓
✓
Programming Tables  
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[115] Extension Ringing  
Pattern Selection  
[116]  
Conference Pattern Selection  
3-Party  
C-0 E-3  
3-Party  
C-1 E-3  
3-Party  
C-2 E-3  
5-Party  
C-2 E-5  
Selection  
Single  
Double  
Triple  
Default  
Change  
✓
✓
[117]  
Call Pickup Tone  
[118]  
Pulse Restriction  
[119] Redialling after  
Pulse to Tone Conversion  
[120]  
Bell Frequency  
Selection  
Default  
Change  
Enable  
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
20 Hz  
25 Hz  
✓
✓
✓
✓
[121] Automatic Exchange Line  
Access Number Selection  
[122] Automatic Rotation  
for Exchange Line Access  
Selection  
Default  
Change  
Dial 0  
Dial 9  
Enable  
Disable  
✓
✓
[123]  
Break Ratio  
[124] SLT Ringing  
Mode Selection  
[125] Call Barring  
[126] DSS  
Off-Hook Mode  
Check for  
and #  
Selection  
Default  
Change  
MODE 1 MODE 2  
MODE 1  
MODE 2  
Enable  
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
✓
✓
✓
✓
[127] Pickup Group Set  
Extension group no. (1 8, : all)  
…
Default  
All  
Selection  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Disable  
Enable  
✓
[200] Hold Recall Time  
Selection  
Default  
Change  
30 sec  
1 min  
1.5 min  
2 min  
3 min  
4 min  
5 min  
6 min  
Disable  
✓
[201]  
Transfer Recall Time  
[202]  
[203]  
Pickup Dial Delay Time  
Call Forwarding Start Time  
Selection  
Default  
Change  
15 sec 30 sec 1 min 2 min 5 sec 10 sec 15 sec 20 sec 1 sec 2 sec 3 sec 4 sec  
✓
✓
✓
7-8  
Programming Tables  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[204] Call Duration Count Start Time  
Selection  
Default  
Change  
5 sec  
10 sec 15 sec 20 sec 25 sec 30 sec 35 sec 40 sec 45 sec 50 sec Instantly  
✓
[206]  
Dialling Start Time  
Selection  
Default  
Change  
0 ms  
250 ms 500 ms 750 ms 1000 ms 1250 ms 1500 ms  
✓
[207]  
[208]  
Recall Timing Range Selection  
Interdigit Time  
Selection  
Default  
Change  
MODE 1 MODE 2 MODE 3 MODE 4 MODE 5  
5 sec  
10 sec 15 sec 20 sec  
✓
✓
[210]  
DTMF Time  
[211] No Dial  
Disconnection  
[212] Exchange Line  
Duration Time Limit  
[213]  
Bell Off Detection  
…
Selection  
Default  
Change  
MODE 1 MODE 2 Enable  
Disable  
1
32 minutes  
10 minutes  
3 sec  
6 sec  
12 sec  
✓
✓
✓
[300] Carrier Excepted Code Assignment  
CODE no.  
Carrier code (10 digits max.)  
CODE no.  
Carrier code (10 digits max.)  
Default: All  
Not stored  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
[301] Call Barring — System Speed Dialling Boundary Class  
Selection  
Default  
Change  
Class-1  
Class-2  
Class-3  
Class-4  
Class-5  
✓
Programming Tables  
7-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[302] Call Barring  
[303] Call Barring  
[304] Call Barring  
[305] Call Barring  
– Class 2 Denied Codes – Class 3 Denied Codes – Class 4 Denied Codes – Class 5 Denied Codes  
CODE no.  
Telephone no. (11 digits)  
All: Not stored  
Default  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
7-10  
Programming Tables  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[306] Call Barring – Exception Codes  
Code no.  
Default  
01  
Telephone no. (11 digits)  
Code no.  
Telephone no. (11 digits)  
All: Not stored  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
Programming Tables  
7-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[309] Emergency Dial Number Set  
CODE no.  
Emergency no. (11 digits max.)  
Default  
Code-01 = 999, Code-02 = 112, Other codes = Not stored  
1
2
3
4
5
[310] Account Codes  
CODE no.  
Account code (4 digits)  
CODE no.  
Account code (4 digits)  
Default  
01  
All: Not stored  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
7-12  
Programming Tables  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[311] Automatic Pause Insertion Codes  
CODE no.  
Default  
01  
Pause code (7 digits max.)  
CODE no.  
Pause code (7 digits max.)  
All: Not stored  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
[312] Call Barring – Extension Lock Boundary Class  
Default  
Change  
Disable  
COS-2  
COS-3  
COS-4  
COS-5  
✓
[350] ARS Selection  
Exchange line no. (1 6, : All)  
…
Default  
All  
Selection  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Enable  
Disable  
✓
Programming Tables  
7-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[351] Route 1 Selection Codes (Leading Digits)  
Code no.  
Default  
01  
Area code no. (7 digits max.)  
Code no.  
Area code no. (7 digits max.)  
All: Not stored  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
7-14  
Programming Tables  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[352] Route 2 Selection Codes (Leading Digits)  
Code no.  
Default  
01  
Area code no. (7 digits max.)  
Code no.  
Area code no. (7 digits max.)  
All: Not stored  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
Programming Tables  
7-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[353] Route 3 Selection Codes (Leading Digits)  
Code no.  
Default  
01  
Area code no. (7 digits max.)  
Code no.  
Area code no. (7 digits max.)  
All: Not stored  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
7-16  
Programming Tables  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[354] Route 4 Selection Codes (Leading Digits)  
Code no.  
Default  
01  
Area code no. (7 digits max.)  
Code no.  
Area code no. (7 digits max.)  
All: Not stored  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
Programming Tables  
7-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[355] Route 1 Exception Codes  
Code no.  
Default  
01  
Area code no. (7 digits max.)  
Code no.  
Area code no. (7 digits max.)  
All: Not stored  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
7-18  
Programming Tables  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[356] Route 2 Exception Codes  
Code no.  
Default  
01  
Area code no. (7 digits max.)  
Code no.  
Area code no. (7 digits max.)  
All: Not stored  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
Programming Tables  
7-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[357] Route 3 Exception Codes  
Code no.  
Default  
01  
Area code no. (7 digits max.)  
Code no.  
Area code no. (7 digits max.)  
All: Not stored  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
7-20  
Programming Tables  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[358] Route 4 Exception Codes  
Code no.  
Default  
01  
Area code no. (7 digits max.)  
Code no.  
Area code no. (7 digits max.)  
All: Not stored  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
Programming Tables  
7-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[359] 1st Carrier Selection Code (BT Line Access Code)  
Selection  
Default  
Change  
1st carrier access code (4 digits max.)  
121 (British Telecom Line access code)  
[360] ARS Modification  
– Removed Digits  
[361] ARS Modification  
[364]  
ARS Trunk Group  
– Added Number  
Trunk (TRK) group no.  
Deleted digits  
Added no. : 20 digits max.  
…
(1 6,  
)
Route no.  
…
…
(0 9)  
(0 9, , #)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Default  
All routes – 0  
Route 1 = 131, Other routes = Not stored  
All routes –  
1
2
3
4
[362]  
[363]  
ARS Dial Tone Pattern Selection  
ARS Interdigit Time  
…
20 seconds  
Selection  
Default  
Change  
Disable  
Tone 1  
Tone 2  
Tone 3  
1
✓
5 seconds  
[381] Route 1  
Authorisation Code  
[382] Route 2  
Authorisation Code  
[383] Route 3  
Authorisation Code  
[384] Route 4  
Authorisation Code  
Exchange line  
no.  
…
Authorisation code : 19 digits max. (0 9)  
Default  
All: Not stored  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7-22  
Programming Tables  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[385]  
[386]  
[387]  
[388]  
Route 1 Itemised Bill Route 2 Itemised Bill Route 3 Itemised Bill Route 4 Itemised Bill  
Selection Selection Selection Selection  
Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable  
Exchange line  
no.  
Default: All  
✓
✓
✓
✓
1
2
3
4
5
6
[389] Itemised Bill Code Assignment  
Extension  
port no.  
Extension  
port no.  
…
…
Itemised bill code : 3 digits max. (0 9)  
Itemised bill code : 3 digits max. (0 9)  
Default  
01  
Extension ports 01 through 24 = 201 through 224  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
[400] Exchange Line  
Connection Assignment  
[402] Pulse  
Speed Selection  
[401] Dial Mode  
Selection  
Selection  
Pulse  
Selection  
Exchange line no.  
Connect  
No Connect  
DTMF  
Call Blocking Low Speed High Speed  
Default: All  
✓
✓
✓
1
2
3
4
5
6
Programming Tables  
7-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[404] Trunk Group  
Assignment  
[403] Host PBX Access Codes  
…
Access codes  
(1 or 2 digits, 8 different codes max.)  
Trunk group no. (1 6)  
Exchange line no.  
Default  
All: Not stored  
Default  
Change  
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
—
[405] Flexible Outward Dialling Assignment — Day  
Exchange line 1 Exchange line 2 Exchange line 3 Exchange line 4 Exchange line 5 Exchange line 6  
Selection  
(All)  
Extension  
port no.  
Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable  
Default: All  
01  
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
7-24  
Programming Tables  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[406] Flexible Outward Dialling Assignment — Night  
Exchange line 1 Exchange line 2 Exchange line 3 Exchange line 4 Exchange line 5 Exchange line 6  
Selection  
* (All)  
Extension  
port no.  
Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable  
Default: All  
01  
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
Programming Tables  
7-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[407] Flexible Outward Dialling Assignment — Lunch  
Exchange line 1 Exchange line 2 Exchange line 3 Exchange line 4 Exchange line 5 Exchange line 6  
Selection  
(All)  
Extension  
port no.  
Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable  
Default: All  
01  
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
7-26  
Programming Tables  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[408] Flexible Ringing Assignment — Day  
Exchange line 1 Exchange line 2 Exchange line 3 Exchange line 4 Exchange line 5 Exchange line 6  
Selection  
(All)  
Extension  
port no.  
Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable  
Default: All  
01  
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
Programming Tables  
7-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[409] Flexible Ringing Assignment — Night  
Exchange line 1 Exchange line 2 Exchange line 3 Exchange line 4 Exchange line 5 Exchange line 6  
Selection  
(All)  
Extension  
port no.  
Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable  
Default: All  
01  
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
7-28  
Programming Tables  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[410] Flexible Ringing Assignment — Lunch  
Exchange line 1 Exchange line 2 Exchange line 3 Exchange line 4 Exchange line 5 Exchange line 6  
Selection  
(All)  
Extension  
port no.  
Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable  
Default: All  
01  
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
Programming Tables  
7-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[411] Delayed Ringing Assignment — Day  
Exchange line 1 Exchange line 2 Exchange line 3 Exchange line 4 Exchange line 5 Exchange line 6  
(All)  
Extension  
port no.  
Selection (I: Immediately, 10: 10 seconds delay, 20: 20 seconds delay, 30: 30 seconds delay)  
10 20 30  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
10 20 30  
10 20 30  
10 20 30  
10 20 30  
10 20 30  
10 20 30  
Default: All ✓  
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
7-30  
Programming Tables  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[412] Delayed Ringing Assignment — Night  
Exchange line 1 Exchange line 2 Exchange line 3 Exchange line 4 Exchange line 5 Exchange line 6  
(All)  
Extension  
port no.  
Selection (I: Immediately, 10: 10 seconds delay, 20: 20 seconds delay, 30: 30 seconds delay)  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
10 20 30  
10 20 30  
10 20 30  
10 20 30  
10 20 30  
10 20 30  
10 20 30  
Default: All ✓  
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
Programming Tables  
7-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[413] Delayed Ringing Assignment — Lunch  
Exchange line 1 Exchange line 2 Exchange line 3 Exchange line 4 Exchange line 5 Exchange line 6  
(All)  
Extension  
port no.  
Selection (I: Immediately, 10: 10 seconds delay, 20: 20 seconds delay, 30: 30 seconds delay)  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
10 20 30  
10 20 30  
10 20 30  
10 20 30  
10 20 30  
10 20 30  
10 20 30  
Default: All ✓  
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
7-32  
Programming Tables  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[414] Exchange Line Mode  
— Day  
[415] Exchange Line Mode  
— Night  
[416] Exchange Line Mode  
— Lunch  
…
Selection — N: Normal, DIL + Extension port no. (01 24), D1: DISA1, D2: DISA2, U: UCD  
Exchange line  
no.  
N
DIL Extn. no. D1 D2  
U
N
DIL Extn. no. D1 D2  
U
N
DIL Extn. no. D1 D2  
U
Default: All  
✓
✓
✓
1
2
3
4
5
6
[417]  
[418]  
Pause Time  
Recall Time  
Selection (milliseconds)  
160 300 600  
Selection (seconds)  
Exchange line no.  
1.5  
2.5  
3.5  
4.5  
80  
100  
900  
1200  
Default: All  
✓
✓
1
2
3
4
5
6
[419] Automatic Designated  
Exchange Line Access  
[420] Calling Party  
Control (CPC) Signal  
[421] CPC Detection  
for Outgoing Calls  
Selection  
Selection  
Selection: 00 (Disable),  
00 (22 msec) 75 (614 msec)  
Exchange line no.  
…
Enable  
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
Default: All  
✓
00 (Disable)  
✓
1
2
3
4
5
6
Programming Tables  
7-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[422]  
Disconnect Time  
[423] Exchange Line  
Ringing Pattern Selection  
[424] Reverse (Polarity)  
Circuit Assignment  
Selection (seconds)  
Selection  
Selection  
Exchange line no.  
0.5  
2.0  
4.0  
Single  
Double  
Triple  
Enable  
Disable  
Default: All  
✓
✓
✓
1
2
3
4
5
6
[500] DISA Incoming Dialling Mode Selection  
Selection  
Without AA  
With AA  
Default  
Change  
✓
[501] DISA Built-in Auto Attendant  
Selection  
…
Auto attendant  
no.  
…
Jack: Extension port no. (01 24)  
GRP: Extension group no. (1 8)  
Default  
All: Not stored  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
7-34  
Programming Tables  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[502]  
[503]  
OGM Mode Selection  
FAX Connection  
…
Selection  
Default  
Change  
MODE 1 MODE 2 MODE 3 MODE 4 MODE 5 MODE 6  
Extension port no. (01 24) / Disable  
✓
Disable (Not assigned)  
[504]  
[505]  
DISA Delayed Answer Time  
DISA Waiting Time after OGM  
Selection  
Default  
Change  
0 sec  
3 sec  
6 sec  
12 sec  
0 sec  
5 sec  
10 sec  
15 sec  
✓
✓
[506]  
DISA Busy Mode  
[507] DISA  
Intercept Mode  
[508]  
DISA Ringing Time before Intercept  
Selection Disconnect Call Waiting DISA 2 Intercept Disconnect 10 sec 20 sec 30 sec 40 sec 60 sec 120 sec  
Default  
Change  
✓
✓
✓
[509]  
DISA Ringing Time after Intercept  
[510]  
DISA No Dial Mode  
DISA 1 DISA 2  
Intercept Disconnect Intercept Disconnect  
Selection  
10 sec 20 sec 30 sec 40 sec 60 sec 120 sec  
Default  
Change  
✓
✓
✓
[513]  
Cyclic Tone Detection  
Selection  
Default  
Disable 2 Times 3 Times 4 Times  
✓
Change  
[514] FAX  
Tone Detection  
[515] Intercept Time  
for Internal DISA  
[517]  
DISA AA Wait Time  
Selection  
Default  
Change  
1 Time 2 Times  
3 sec  
6 sec  
9 sec  
1 sec  
2 sec  
3 sec  
4 sec  
5 sec  
✓
✓
✓
Programming Tables  
7-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[516] DISA Incoming Assignment  
Selection  
Selection  
Extension  
port no.  
Extension  
port no.  
Enable  
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
Default: All  
✓
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
[519]  
[520]  
UCD Group  
DISA OGM Mute Time  
…
Selection  
Default  
Change  
0 sec  
2 sec  
4 sec  
6 sec  
Extension group no. (1 8)  
1
✓
[521]  
[522]  
[523]  
UCD Busy Mode  
UCD Busy Waiting Time  
UCD OGM Message Interval Time  
…
…
Selection  
Default  
Change  
1
32 minutes, 1 59 seconds 30 sec  
10 minutes  
1 min  
1.5 min  
2 min  
Intercept Disconnect  
✓
✓
[524]  
[525]  
UCD Ringing Time before Intercept  
UCD Intercept Mode  
Selection  
Default  
Change  
Intercept  
Disconnect  
10 sec  
20 sec  
30 sec  
40 sec  
60 sec  
120 sec  
✓
✓
[526] UCD Ringing Time after Intercept  
Selection  
Default  
Change  
10 sec  
20 sec  
30 sec  
40 sec  
60 sec  
120 sec  
✓
7-36  
Programming Tables  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[600]  
[604]  
Extension Group Assignment  
Extension Name Setting  
…
Extension group no. (1 8)  
Extension name  
(10 character max.)  
Extension  
port no.  
Default: All – Group 1  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Default: All – Not stored  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
Programming Tables  
7-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[601] Call Barring – Class of  
Service Assignment — Day  
[602] Call Barring – Class of  
Service Assignment — Night  
[603] Call Barring – Class of  
Service Assignment — Lunch  
…
…
…
COS no. (1 5)  
COS no. (1 5)  
COS no. (1 5)  
Extension  
port no.  
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
Default: All  
01  
✓
✓
✓
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
7-38  
Programming Tables  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[605]  
[606] Call Transfer to [607] Call Forwarding  
Account Code Entry Mode  
an Exchange Line  
to an Exchange Line  
Selection  
Selection  
Selection  
Extension  
port no.  
Verify-Toll  
(Call Barring)  
Option  
Forced  
Verify-All  
Enable  
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
Default: All  
01  
✓
✓
✓
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
Programming Tables  
7-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[608] Executive  
Busy Override  
[609] Do Not  
Disturb Override  
[610] Parallelled  
Telephone Connection  
[611]  
TAM Extension  
Selection  
Selection  
Selection  
Selection  
Extension  
port no.  
Enable  
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
Default: All  
01  
✓
✓
✓
✓
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
7-40  
Programming Tables  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[612]  
[613] Exchange Line  
[614]  
Room Monitor  
Assignment  
Duration Time Limit  
Selection  
Internal Pulse  
Detection  
Selection  
Selection  
Selection  
Extension  
port no.  
Enable  
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
Default: All  
01  
✓
✓
✓
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
[615] LCD Language Assignment  
Selection  
Spanish  
Selection  
Spanish  
English  
Portuguese  
English  
Portuguese  
Default: All  
✓
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
Programming Tables  
7-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[700] Doorphone Ringing  
Assignment — Day  
[701] Doorphone Ringing  
Assignment — Night  
[702] Doorphone Ringing  
Assignment — Lunch  
…
D
1
4: Doorphone no., E: Enable / D: Disable  
Extension  
port no.  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
E
D
E
D
E
D
E
E
D
E
D
E
D
E
D
E
D
E
D
E
D
E
D
Default: All  
01  
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
7-42  
Programming Tables  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[703] Door Opener  
Assignment — Day  
[704] Door Opener  
Assignment — Night  
[705] Door Opener  
Assignment — Lunch  
…
1
4: Door opener no., E: Enable / D: Disable  
Extension  
port no.  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
E
D
E
D
E
D
E
D
E
D
E
D
E
D
E
D
E
D
E
D
E
D
E
D
Default: All  
01  
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
[706] Doorphone Ringing  
/ Tone Pattern Selection  
[707] Doorphone  
Access Tone Selection  
[708] Doorphone  
Ringing Time  
Selection  
Selection  
Selection  
Doorphone  
no.  
Single  
Double  
Triple  
S-Double  
Enable  
Disable  
15 sec  
30 sec  
Default: All  
✓
✓
✓
1
2
3
4
Programming Tables  
7-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Programming Tables  
[709] Door Opener Time  
Selection  
4 sec 5 sec  
Door opener  
no.  
1 sec  
2 sec  
3 sec  
6 sec  
7 sec  
8 sec  
Default: All  
✓
1
2
3
4
[800] SMDR RS-232C Communication Parameters  
New line  
code  
Word  
Stop  
bit  
Baud rate  
length  
Parity  
Selection  
CR+LF CR 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600  
7
8
Mark Space Even Odd None  
1
2
Default  
Change  
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
[801] SMDR Parameter  
[802] Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for Printing  
Default  
Selection  
Default  
Selection  
On  
Off  
On  
✓
Page length  
(4 99)  
66  
0
Incoming calls  
Outgoing calls  
…
✓
Skip perforation  
…
(0 95)  
Off  
Toll  
[803] Secret Speed Dialling /  
[805]  
One-Touch Dialling Printing SMDR Account Code Selection  
Selection  
Default  
Change  
No Printing  
Printing  
CODE  
INDEX  
✓
✓
[806]  
SMDR Language Assignment  
Selection  
Default  
Change  
English Spanish Portuguese  
✓
7-44  
Programming Tables  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
169 mm  
ƒ
92.5 mm  
185 mm  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copyright:  
This manual is copyrighted by Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co., Ltd. (KME). Under the copyright laws, this  
manual may not be reproduced in any form, in whole or part, without the prior written consent of KME and its  
licensee.  
C Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co., Ltd. 1999  
Panasonic Business Systems U.K.  
Panasonic House, Willoughby Road, Bracknell, Berkshire RG12 8FP  
Printed in the United Kingdom  
PSQX1708YA KK1099CM0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Hybrid System  
KX-TA624  
Operating Instructions for  
the Caller ID Card (KX-TA62493)  
In this manual, the suffix of each model number is omitted.  
The Caller ID Card supports the following.  
It receives the Caller ID service from the Local Exchange. The Caller ID service provides a  
display proprietary telephone (KX-T7130) user with the caller’s information, such as the  
name and telephone number, on the exchange line assigned to receive Caller ID service  
calls. A contract with a Telephone Company is required.  
Incoming outside call information from the Caller ID service can be recorded in memory.  
Also, the extension user can call back the caller easily by checking the call log.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Section 1 Installation  
1.1 Caller ID Card Installation.................................................................. 1-2  
1.2 System Features..................................................................................... 1-4  
C
S
Caller ID ............................................................................................. 1-4  
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)  
with the Caller ID Card .................................................................. 1-7  
1.3 System Programming............................................................................ 1-8  
[900] Caller ID Assignment.............................................................. 1-8  
[901] Caller ID Area Code Assignment............................................ 1-8  
[902] Caller ID Modification for Local Calls................................... 1-9  
[903] Caller ID Modification for Long Distance Calls .................... 1-10  
[904] Caller ID Log Priority Selection............................................. 1-11  
[906] Caller ID SMDR Format......................................................... 1-11  
1.4 Programming Tables............................................................................. 1-12  
Section 2 Operations  
2.1 Proprietary Telephone Settings............................................................ 2-2  
Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone ..................................... 2-2  
2.2 Telephone Features................................................................................ 2-4  
C
Call Information/Log, Incoming ........................................................ 2-4  
Call Log, Incoming............................................................................. 2-5  
Electronic Extension Lockout ............................................................ 2-8  
E
2.3 Display Example.................................................................................... 2-9  
• For proprietary telephone operations, all button illustrations are based on the KX-T7130.  
!
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 1  
Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.1  
Caller ID Card Installation  
1. Power off the system, and unplug the AC cord.  
2. Loosen the screw.  
3. Remove the top front cover.  
Top front cover  
Screw  
4. Remove the 2 screws.  
Screws  
5. Open the bottom front cover.  
Bottom front cover  
1-2  
Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.1  
Caller ID Card Installation  
6. Attach the Caller ID Card.  
Caller ID Card  
(for exchange lines 1 – 3)  
Install the Caller ID Card  
(for exchange lines 4 – 6) here.  
Note  
Please do not damage this part.  
7. Insert the flat cable to the connector.  
Flat cable  
8. Close the cover.  
• Be sure the frame of the main unit is connected to the ground (☞ Installation Manual,  
2.5 “Frame Ground Connection”).  
!
Installation  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.2  
System Features  
Caller ID  
Provides a display proprietary telephone (KX-T7130) user with the caller’s information, such  
as the name and telephone number, on the exchange line assigned to receive Caller ID  
service.  
• A contract with a Telephone Company is required.  
• An optional Caller ID Card must be installed to the system.  
• All 6 exchange lines can be supported by installing 2 Caller ID Cards. One Caller ID  
Card supports 3 exchange lines.  
!
• System Programming is required to execute this feature.  
• A display proprietary telephone user can record the caller’s information  
(☞ 2.2 Telephone Features, “Call Log, Incoming”). Up to 20 calls can be logged per  
extension.  
• Only the first 16 digits of the caller’s information can be displayed on the LCD while a  
call is being received, or during a conversation. The first 13 digits are displayed when  
logged information is shown.  
• An assigned name in program [011] “System Speed Dialling Name Setting” will be  
displayed when the caller’s telephone number matches one of System Speed Dialling  
numbers assigned in program [001] “System Speed Dialling Entry” and a Telephone  
Company does not provide the caller’s name.  
• If a Telephone Company provides a caller’s name, the name from the Telephone  
Company will be displayed even when a name assigned in program [011] is effective.  
• If both the number and name are available, the user can select the initial display, number  
or name, by program [904] “Caller ID Log Priority Selection”.  
• Some Telephone Companies do not provide the caller’s name with the Caller ID service.  
• The caller’s telephone number may not be provided in some cases, for example, an  
international or mobile telephone call. In this case, the display will show “OUT OF  
AREA”, etc.  
1-4  
Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.2  
System Features  
Flow chart of Caller ID  
*1  
An outside call is received by the Caller ID line.  
With both the caller’  
s
number and the name  
What is the Caller ID service type  
from the Telephone Company ?  
With the caller’s number only  
*2  
No  
Is your area code assigned?  
Yes  
No  
Does the caller’s number match your area code?  
Yes  
<No modification>  
*3  
*4  
Removing and adding the number.  
Removing and adding the number.  
The reference number has been fixed.  
*5  
Does the reference number match  
a System Speed Dialling number?  
No  
Yes  
*6  
Is the matched System Speed Dialling  
number assigned the name?  
No  
Yes  
*7  
Either the number or the name is displayed.  
The number is displayed.  
Note: The explanation for *1 through *7 is on the next page.  
Installation  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.2  
System Features  
*1: The Caller ID line is assigned in program [900] “Caller ID Assignment”.  
*2: Your area code is assigned in program [901] “Caller ID Area Code Assignment”.  
*3: The caller’s telephone number is modified according to program [902] “Caller ID Modification  
for Local Calls”.  
*4: The caller’s telephone number is modified according to program [903] “Caller ID Modification  
for Long Distance Calls”.  
*5: System Speed Dialling numbers are assigned in program [001] “System Speed Dialling  
Entry”. When one of System Speed Dialling numbers includes the reference number, the  
system regards them as a match. A line access code (9, 0 or 81 through 86) and/or an account  
code assigned in program [310] “Account Codes” in the System Speed Dialling number are  
disregarded for the match. The system checks the System Speed Dialling number after a line  
access code and/or an account code with the reference number.  
*6: Assigning a name to a System Speed Dialling number is in program [011] “System Speed  
Dialling Name Setting”.  
*7: The user can select the initial display, number or name, by program [904] “Caller ID Log  
Priority Selection”. The displayed number is the caller’s telephone number, not the modified  
one.  
Example (With the caller’s number only):  
[901] “Caller ID Area Code Assignment”: 201  
[903] “Caller ID Modification for Long Distance Calls”: Deleted digits – 3  
Added number – 1  
<Caller’s telephone number>  
123 456 789  
<Modified (reference) number >  
1456 789  
[001] “System Speed Dialling Entry”: (Speed dialling no. 30)  
81 1234 1456789  
line access code account code match  
[011] “System Speed Dialling Name Setting”: (Speed dialling no. 30) Richard  
[904] “Caller ID Log Priority Selection”: Name  
<Display>  
Richard  
• The name and the number can be displayed  
alternately by pressing Caller ID Selection button  
(☞ 2.1 Proprietary Telephone Settings,  
“Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone”,  
Caller ID Selection Button (Assignment)).  
123456789  
1-6  
Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.2  
System Features  
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) with the Caller ID Card  
When the Caller ID Card is installed, a received caller’s telephone number (maximum 16  
digits) will be printed out after <incoming> or <DISA incoming> as shown below, if the  
calling party has enabled Caller ID service. Refer to the Installation Manual, Section 3  
Features, “Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)” for more information about SMDR.  
An example of a printed call record:  
Date  
Time  
Ext.  
CO  
Dial number  
Duration  
Code  
31/12/98 12:52PM 203  
31/12/98 12:53PM 203  
31/12/98 *12:54PM 201  
31/12/98 1:04PM 203  
31/12/98 1:04PM 202  
31/12/98 1:05PM 203  
31/12/98 1:06PM 203  
31/12/98 1:06PM 202  
31/12/98 1:07PM 203  
31/12/98 2:15PM 203  
31/12/98 2:26PM 203  
31/12/98 2:27PM 216  
31/12/98 3:25PM  
05  
02  
02  
06  
05  
01  
01  
02  
01  
01  
01  
05  
02  
12345678901234567890123456789012  
00:00'16  
00:01'43  
. .. .  
. .. .  
. .. .  
4536  
. .. .  
. .. .  
. .. .  
. .. .  
.. 13  
. 201  
. .. .  
. .. .  
. .. .  
<
<
incoming  
incoming  
>2013570846  
>1234567890123456 00:07'48  
092. . . 1438  
<
00:00'06  
DISA incoming >2013570846  
00:00'09  
00:00'08  
00:00'08  
00:00'17  
00:11'00  
00:11'00  
00:03'00  
00:13'55  
00:11'48  
<
DISA incoming  
>
092123456789  
0921234567  
0921234567  
0921234567  
F/0927654321  
9=0924567123  
<
UCD Waiting  
>
• A received caller’s telephone number will be printed out only when “With CID” is  
selected in program [906] “Caller ID SMDR Format”.  
!
• Related Feature References  
☞
Installation Manual, Section 3 Features  
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)  
Installation  
1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.3  
System Programming  
[900]-[901]  
[900] Caller ID Assignment  
Enables or disables the Caller ID feature for each exchange line which has contracted the  
Caller ID service from a Telephone Company.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
STORE  
exchange line no.*  
END  
SELECT  
9
0
0
NEXT  
(1···6/  
)
(Enable/  
To continue  
Disable)  
SELECT  
* Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)  
Default All exchange lines – Disable  
• The exchange lines, if set to “Enable” in this program, always set the DISA Delayed  
Answer timer to 6 seconds even if “0 sec” or “3 sec” is selected in program [504] “DISA  
Delayed Answer Time”.  
!
[901] Caller ID Area Code Assignment  
Assigns your area code (up to 5 codes) which is required to use the Caller ID feature. If the  
received caller’s number has one of the assigned area codes, it is recognised as a local call.  
If the area code is different, it is recognised as a long distance call. By assigning your area  
code, the system records the caller’s number modified in programs [902] “Caller ID  
Modification for Local Calls” or [903] “Caller ID Modification for Long Distance Calls”.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
STORE  
code no.  
area code  
END  
9
0
1
NEXT  
(1···5)  
6 digits max.  
(0···9)  
To continue  
SELECT  
Default  
Not stored.  
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.  
!
1-8  
Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[902]  
1.3  
System Programming  
[902] Caller ID Modification for Local Calls  
Assigns the removed digits and added number for a received local call number, which has  
one of area codes programmed in [901] “Caller ID Area Code Assignment”. This program  
makes the final number which will be recorded in memory. The extension user can call back  
the caller easily by checking the call log. Digits are removed from or added to the beginning  
of the received number.  
< Assigns the deleted digits. >  
deleted digits  
STORE  
END  
9
0
2
NEXT  
(0···9)  
< Assigns the added number. >  
added number  
If added number  
is assigned  
STORE  
END  
4 digits max.  
(0···9,#,  
)
Example:  
[901]: 201  
[902]: Deleted digits – 3 / Added number – Not stored  
Caller’s number provided by the Local Exchange: 2011234567  
Logged (modified) number : 1234567  
Default  
Deleted digits – 3 / Added number – Not stored.  
• Program [901] “Caller ID Area Code Assignment” is required for this program.  
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.  
!
Installation  
1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.3  
System Programming  
[903]  
[903] Caller ID Modification for Long Distance Calls  
Assigns the removed digits and added number for a received long distance call number,  
which does not have any area codes programmed in [901] “Caller ID Area Code  
Assignment”. This program makes the final number which will be recorded in memory.  
The extension user can call back the caller easily by checking the call log. Digits are  
removed from or added to the beginning of the received number.  
< Assigns the deleted digits. >  
deleted digits  
STORE  
END  
9
0
3
NEXT  
(0···9)  
< Assigns the added number. >  
If added number  
is assigned  
added number  
STORE  
END  
4 digits max.  
(0···9,#,  
)
Example:  
[901]: 201  
[903]: Deleted digits – 0 (No deletion) / Added number – 1  
Caller’s number provided by the Local Exchange: 7149876543  
Logged (modified) number  
: 17149876543  
Default Deleted digits – 0 (No deletion) / Added number – 1  
• Program [901] “Caller ID Area Code Assignment” is required for this program.  
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.  
!
1-10  
Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[904], [906]  
1.3  
System Programming  
[904] Caller ID Log Priority Selection  
Selects the first display of an incoming outside call by the Caller ID service. Either the  
name or number can be selected if the Caller ID service supports both the name and number.  
or  
PREV  
NEXT  
To continue  
extension port no.*  
NEXT  
END  
9
0
4
SELECT  
STORE  
(01···16/  
)
(Name/  
To continue  
Number)  
SELECT  
* Extension port number: 01 through 16 / (All extension ports)  
Default All extension ports – Name  
• This program is available when your Caller ID service provides both the name and number.  
If only the number is provided, this program is not necessary.  
!
[906] Caller ID SMDR Format  
Selects whether a Caller ID number is printed out or not on an SMDR printout.  
SELECT  
END  
STORE  
9
0
6
NEXT  
(Without CID/  
With CID)*  
* Without CID (Not printed) / With CID (Printed)  
Default With CID  
• Even if a name is also sent by the Caller ID service, only the number is printed.  
!
Installation  
1-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.4  
Programming Tables  
[900] Caller ID Assignment  
…
Default  
All  
Exchange line no. (1 6, : All)  
Selection  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Enable  
Disable  
✓
[901] Caller ID Area Code Assignment  
CODE no.  
Parameter: 6 digits max., 0 – 9  
All: Not stored  
Default  
1
2
3
4
5
[902] Caller ID Modification  
for Local Calls  
[903] Caller ID Modification  
for Long Distance Calls  
Selection  
Default  
3
Change  
Default  
0
Change  
Number of digits to be deleted  
…
(0 9, 0: no deletion)  
Number to be added  
(4 digits max.)  
blank (not stored)  
1
[904] Caller ID Log Priority Selection  
Selection  
Selection  
Extension  
jack no.  
Extension  
jack no.  
Number  
Name  
Number  
Name  
Default: All  
✓
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
[906] Caller ID SMDR Format  
Selection  
Default  
Change  
Without CID  
With CID  
✓
1-12  
Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 2  
Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.1  
Proprietary Telephone Settings  
Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone  
Caller ID Indication Button (Assignment)  
Allows you to assign a Flexible line key as the Caller ID Indication button. The Caller ID  
Indication button can be used in the following cases.  
1) Informing you that there is new caller information logged by lighting the indicator  
2) Recording caller’s information in memory during a conversation  
3) Checking logged caller’s information while on-hook  
4) Calling back the logged number  
PT  
AUTO DIAL  
CO  
6
STORE  
Press the desired Flexible CO button  
you wish to assign as the Caller ID  
Indication button.  
Dial 6.  
Press STORE.  
<PT Display Example>  
CID Indication  
• The STORE indicator lights.  
• The display shows the initial programming mode.  
• Be sure the handset is on the cradle and the SP-PHONE button is off.  
• To program, set the MEMORY switch on the proprietary telephone to “PROGRAM”.  
• After programming, return the MEMORY switch to the “SET” position.  
!
• 2.2 Telephone Features, “Call Information/Log, Incoming”  
• 2.2 Telephone Features, “Call Log, Incoming”  
☞
2-2  
Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.1  
Proprietary Telephone Settings  
Caller ID Selection Button (Assignment)  
Allows you to assign a Flexible line key as the Caller ID Selection button. The Caller ID  
Selection button can be used in the following cases.  
1) Confirming a caller’s information while receiving a call or during a conversation  
2) Checking the number of logged calls  
3) Informing you when no more caller’s information can be logged by lighting the  
indicator  
PT  
AUTO DIAL  
CO  
7
STORE  
Press the desired Flexible CO button  
you wish to assign as the Caller ID  
Selection button.  
Dial 7.  
Press STORE.  
<PT Display Example>  
• The STORE indicator lights.  
• The display shows the initial programming  
mode.  
CID Selection  
• Be sure the handset is on the cradle and the SP-PHONE button is off.  
• To program, set the MEMORY switch on the proprietary telephone to “PROGRAM”.  
• After programming, return the MEMORY switch to the “SET” position.  
!
• 2.2 Telephone Features, “Call Information/Log, Incoming”  
• 2.2 Telephone Features, “Call Log, Incoming”  
☞
Operations  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.2  
Telephone Features  
Call Information/Log, Incoming  
Provides you with the caller’s telephone number and name simultaneously on the exchange  
line assigned to receive Caller ID service calls, if the Caller ID service supports both the  
telephone number and name.  
If the call is not answered, the call information is automatically recorded in memory  
(☞ 2.2 Telephone Features, “Call Log, Incoming”).  
Display Operation (— for the KX-T7130 only)  
While receiving an incoming call (on-hook) or during a conversation  
(off-hook), the display shows the caller’s telephone number or name.  
While receiving an incoming call  
• If you want to see other information, press the Caller ID  
Selection button. The display changes as follows.  
JOHN WHITE  
(caller’s name)  
JOHN WHITE  
0111111111  
Call on CO 1  
(caller’s telephone number)  
(CO number)  
During a conversation  
• Press the Caller ID Selection button to see other information.  
The display changes as follows.  
JOHN WHITE  
(caller’s name)  
JOHN WHITE  
(caller’s telephone number)  
(call duration)  
0111111111  
CO 2 12:00’30  
• The Caller ID Indication button indicator light may turn on when a call is received.  
• You can modify and call back the logged numbers. Refer to 2.2 Telephone Features, “Call  
Log, Incoming”.  
• System Programming determines which is displayed first, the name or number.  
• You can program whether to print out a Caller ID number on the SMDR or not by System  
Programming.  
!
2-4  
Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.2  
Telephone Features  
Call Log, Incoming  
If you do not answer a call, your extension (KX-T7130 only) automatically records the  
incoming outside call information from the Caller ID service, and the Caller ID Indication  
button indicator lights. Up to 20 calls can be logged per extension. When the call log is full  
(20 calls are stored), you can select how the twenty-first call is treated. Either a new call can  
be disregarded or the new call can overwrite the oldest call that you have already confirmed  
(Default: Record the new call.).  
You can also modify and call back the logged numbers.  
Even if you answer a call, the call information can be recorded by pressing the Caller ID  
Indication button during the conversation.  
Overwriting the call log  
PT  
7
3
7
1
#
Confirmation tone  
and dial tone  
Hang up or press  
SP-PHONE/MONITOR.  
Lift the handset or press  
SP-PHONE/MONITOR.  
Dial 7371.  
Dial #.  
<PT Display Example>  
Incoming Log On  
Disregarding the twenty-first call  
PT  
7
3
7
0
#
Confirmation tone  
and dial tone  
Hang up or press  
SP-PHONE/MONITOR.  
Lift the handset or press  
SP-PHONE/MONITOR.  
Dial 7370.  
Dial #.  
<PT Display Example>  
Incoming Log Off  
Operations  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.2  
Telephone Features  
Checking  
Display Operation (— for the KX-T7130 only)  
When the Caller ID Indication button indicator is red, there are new  
calls logged.  
1. Press the Caller ID Selection button to confirm the number of  
logged calls.  
<Example>  
If there are 2 unchecked calls and 3 checked calls:  
New:02 Old:03  
• The above information will be displayed for 3 seconds.  
2. Press the Caller ID Indication button while on-hook to see the  
incoming call information.  
01:0111111111  
02:0924773333  
• The new information that you have not checked will be  
displayed first.  
3. You can check another caller’s information by pressing the Caller  
ID Indication button again.  
After displaying all of the new information, the old information you  
have already checked will be displayed.  
• To modify the telephone number, use the HOLD button to erase  
from the first digit. “0 to 9,  
add numbers from the first digit.  
” can be used to  
, # and PAUSE  
• To clear the displayed information, press the TRANSFER button.  
• To clear all logged call information, go off-hook and press 70 #.  
The display shows as follows.  
CID Log Clear  
• To return to the initial display, go off-hook and on-hook, or wait  
for 20 seconds.  
• Pressing the Caller ID Selection button provides you with further  
information about the party.  
The display changes as follows.  
<Example>  
If the information is stored in log 03,  
— caller’s name  
— caller’s number  
— date and time  
03:BOB HANKS  
03:0011223344  
03:30Oct 09:00PM  
• If “OUT OF AREA” is displayed, the call may be from out of  
the calling area.  
• If “LONG DISTANCE” is displayed, it may be a long distance  
call.  
• If “PRIVATE” is displayed, the caller chose not to show their  
information.  
2-6  
Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.2  
Telephone Features  
Calling back  
Display Operation (— for the KX-T7130 only)  
1. Confirm the number displayed in step 2 or 3 of “Checking” (on the  
previous page), and lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE  
button.  
03:0011223344  
2. Press the Caller ID Indication button.  
• You may press a line key first to select a specified exchange line.  
The last displayed number is dialled.  
• When “Disregarding the twenty-first call” has been set and 20 calls are logged, or when  
“Overwriting the call log” has been set and all 20 old information has been overwritten, the  
Caller ID Selection button indicator lights and informs you that no more calls can be  
logged.  
PT  
!
Operations  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.2  
Telephone Features  
Electronic Extension Lockout  
Allows you to lock your extension so that the “Call Log, Incoming” feature is not shown on  
the display when you press the Caller ID Indication button, if you do not want others to see  
the information. This feature also prevents others from making outside calls from your  
extension.  
Locking  
PT  
same code  
lock code lock code  
7
7
#
Dial 77.  
Dial #. Confirmation tone Hang up or press  
Lift the handset or press  
SP-PHONE/MONITOR.  
Enter the 4-digit lock code  
(0000 through 9999) twice.  
and dial tone.  
SP-PHONE/MONITOR.  
<PT Display Example>  
Locked : xxxx  
Lock Code  
Unlocking  
PT  
7
7
#
lock code  
Dial 77.  
Dial #. Confirmation tone Hang up or press  
and dial tone.  
SP-PHONE/MONITOR.  
Lift the handset or press  
SP-PHONE/MONITOR.  
Enter the same lock code  
you used to lock the extension.  
<PT Display Example>  
Unlocked  
• The operator or manager can cancel this feature for all extensions (Electronic Extension  
Lockout — CANCEL ALL).  
• “Remote Extension Lock” overrides this feature. If the operator or manager sets Remote  
Extension Lock on the extension you have already locked, you cannot unlock it.  
PT  
PT  
!
Operating Instructions, Section 1 Operations  
☞
• 1.6 Before Leaving Your Desk, “Locking Your Telephone (Electronic Extension Lockout)”  
• 1.8 Operator / Manager Service Features, “Electronic Extension Lockout — CANCEL ALL”  
• 1.8 Operator / Manager Service Features, “Remote Extension Lock”  
2-8  
Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.3  
Display Example  
Due to the Trilingual Selection Feature, you can select the display in English, Spanish or Portuguese by  
System Programming. The left part is the English display and the right part is the Spanish display.  
ENGLISH DISPLAY  
SPANISH DISPLAY  
DESCRIPTION  
CID Log Clear  
RID Despejado  
Cleared all logs.  
Incoming Log Off Registro ID Off  
Cancelled “Incoming Call Log”.  
Incoming Log On  
Locked:xxxx  
New:02 Old:03  
Unlocked  
Registro ID On  
Bloqueado  
“Incoming Call Log” is set.  
Completed setting “Electronic Extension Lockout”.  
Confirming the number of logged calls.  
Cancelled “Electronic Extension Lockout”.  
Nue:02 Ant:03  
Desbloqueada  
Operations  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Panasonic Business Systems U.K.  
Panasonic House, Willoughby Road, Bracknell, Berkshire RG12 8FP  
Printed in the United Kingdom  
PSQX1744YA KK1099CM1109SM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To expand the sub-menu, left click the  
mouse on the symbol, located to the left of  
the selected text.  
for version 3 Adobe Reader  
for version 4 Adobe Reader  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!  
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!  
KX-TA624 Feature / Programming Overview  
The KX-TA624 has many new and changed features compared with the KX-T30810 / 61610  
This Guide is intended to assist installers who are already familiar with the KX-T30810 / 61610  
This Guide clearly shows the Changed and New features of the KX-TA624 with reference to KX-T30810 / 61610.  
NEW  
Programming (General overview only) :  
Main Section  
Sub - Sections  
Programming  
Step  
000  
001  
006  
007  
SYSTEM FEATURES  
DATE / TIME Setting the system clock  
SPEED DIAL Setting the System Speed Dials  
SYSTEM SWITCHING  
Day / Night / Lunch  
MODE  
TIME  
VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION Voice Mail set-up  
SYSTEM TIMERS  
102 ~ 103  
200 ~ 213  
400  
CO LINE  
OUTGOING CALLS  
LINE CONNECTED  
DIAL MODE  
401  
402  
405 ~ 407  
350 ~ 389  
408 ~ 410  
411 ~ 413  
DIAL PULSE SPEED  
O/G ASSIGNMENT  
ARS (LCR) ASSIGNMENT  
INCOMING RINGING MODE  
Day [414] / Night [415] / Lunch [416]  
NORMAL  
I/C Ring Pattern  
Delayed Ring  
DIL ( Direct In Line )  
Must be used for call FWD  
Enter Jack  
No.  
DISA / UCD / FAX / OGM  
DSS CONSOLE Assignment  
Transfer Mode  
500 ~ 526  
JACKS  
EXTENSIONS  
003 ~ 004  
005  
CALL BARRING (COS) TABLES  
COS ASSIGNMENT  
EXTENSION GROUPS  
300 ~ 312  
601 ~ 603  
600  
FEATURES  
604 ~ 615  
503  
FAX DETECTION ( option required )  
TAM EXTENSION ( Telephone Answer Machine )  
DOORPHONE / OPENER  
611  
700 ~ 709  
Documentation :  
Operating Instructions :  
Section 1  
Section 2  
Operations  
Appendix / Troubleshooting  
Installation Manual :  
Section 1  
Section 2  
Section 3  
Section 4  
Section 5  
Section 6  
Section 7  
Basic System Construction  
Installation of System and all Options  
Feature descriptions  
System Programming steps  
Default Tables for program steps  
Troubleshooting Guide  
Customer Data Programming Tables  
Programming note :  
System Programming :  
A Programming Password has replaced the PBX Program Switch ( KX-T30810/61610 )  
( Password Default Setting : ‘* # 1 2 3 4’ )  
Details in the Installation Manual ( Page 4 - 2 )  
Data Clear Switch :  
An internal ‘Data Clear’ switch has been added to the CPU board.  
Operation described in the Installation Manual ( Page 2 - 34 )  
( 1 of 6 )  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CURRENT & CHANGED Programming Steps  
( with reference to the KX-T30810 / 61610 )  
KX-T  
30810  
KX-T  
61610  
KX-TA  
624  
Description  
Changed or Enhanced  
Features  
00  
01  
00  
01  
02  
000  
001  
003  
004  
Date / Time  
System Speed Dial  
DSS Console Assignment  
DSS Console and Paired Telephone  
Assignment are now separate steps  
-
DSS Console  
Pair Telephone No.  
Dial Mode  
03  
04  
401  
‘Call Blocking’ has been added  
i.e. DTMF is not sent to a pulse mode  
CO line when dialling from a MF  
telephone.  
DTMF / Pulse  
04  
05  
05  
06  
006  
System Switching Mode  
Automatic / Manual  
007  
System Switching Time  
‘Day of week’ & ‘Lunch  
Start / End’ times added  
Day / Night / Lunch  
06  
07  
07  
08  
405  
406  
Flexible Outward Dialling - Day  
Flexible Outward Dialling - Night  
Flexible Outward Dialling - Lunch  
Flexible Ringing Assignment - Day  
Flexible Ringing Assignment - Night  
Flexible Ringing Assignment - Lunch  
Call Barring Class Assignment - Day  
Call Barring Class Assignment - Night  
Call Barring Class Assignment - Lunch  
Call Barring - Deny Codes  
407  
‘Lunch’ Mode added  
-
08  
-
09  
408  
09  
10  
409  
410  
‘Lunch’ Mode added  
COS assignment added for  
Day / Night / Lunch  
Modes  
-
10  
-
11  
601  
12  
602  
603  
11  
33  
14  
13  
14  
16  
17  
302 ~ 305  
COS levels 4 & 5 added  
306  
Call Barring - Allow Codes  
Automatic Answer Mode  
COS levels 4 & 5 added  
Set by extension user  
(Operating Instructions Page 1-35)  
-
403  
-
Host PBX Access Codes  
-
-
19  
Ext. / CO  
Programmable Call Waiting  
Set by extension user  
( Operating Instructions Page 1-45 )  
20  
411  
412  
Delayed Ringing Assignment - Day  
Delayed Ringing Assignment - Night  
Delayed Ringing Assignment - Lunch  
Delayed Ringing count  
Delayed Ringing assignment added  
-
for each mode  
413  
21  
22  
411 ~ 413  
Included in Program Steps 411 ~ 413  
-
21  
Intercom Alert Tone ( Voice / Tone )  
Set by extension user  
(Operating Instructions Page 1-82)  
-
22  
23  
700  
701  
Doorphone Ringing Assignment - Day  
Doorphone Ringing Assignment - Night  
Doorphone Ringing Assignment - Lunch  
Dial Call Pickup  
Doorphone Ringing assignment  
added for each mode  
702  
23  
17  
24  
26  
27  
29  
127  
Sets the Pickup Groups for Extns.  
204  
Call Duration Count Start Timer  
SMDR Communication Parameters  
SMDR Incoming / Outgoing Selection  
800 ~ 801  
802  
-
-
( 2 of 6)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CURRENT & CHANGED Programming Steps  
( with reference to the KX-T30810 / 61610 )  
KX-T  
30810  
KX-T  
61610  
KX-TA  
624  
Description  
Changed or Enhanced  
Features  
25  
26  
27  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
Hold Time Reminder  
Preset to 15 secs  
-
200  
Hold Recall Time Set  
106  
External Pager Access Tone  
Programmable Secret Speed Dials  
Separate ‘Secret’ table not provided  
Refer to ‘Secret Dialling’  
-
( Installation Manual Page 3 – 62 )  
18  
19  
20  
-
34  
35  
36  
37  
418  
422  
420  
005  
Recall Time  
No Earth Recall Option  
Disconnect Time  
Calling Party Control  
DSS Button Mode  
With / Without transfer  
28  
12  
38  
39  
107  
201  
DTMF Receiver Check  
Transfer Recall Time  
More time options added  
( 15secs / 30secs / 1 min / 2mins )  
40  
-
F3 / FWD Key  
Sets F3 to a FWD Key  
Set by extension user  
(Operating Instructions Page 1-12)  
-
31  
-
42  
43  
419  
Automatic CO Line access Outgoing  
Programmable Call Waiting Tone Type  
Set by extension user  
(Operating Instructions Page 1-7)  
-
34  
703  
704  
Door Opener Assignment - Day  
Door Opener Assignment - Night  
Door Opener Assignment - Lunch  
ARS Enable / Disable  
Door Opening can now be  
-
assigned for each Mode  
705  
70  
70  
71  
350  
Enabled on an individual CO basis  
351 ~ 354  
300  
First Digit of ARS Code  
-
-
Carrier Excepted Codes, disregards codes when  
applying ARS or Call Barring  
i.e. Call blocking code (*141)  
-
71  
72  
355 ~ 358  
381 ~ 384  
Carrier Codes Assignment  
Stored Carrier Codes are disregarded  
72  
73  
73  
75  
Authorisation Code  
Carrier Access Code  
Sets the Access Code  
-
360  
ARS Modification – Remove Digits  
ARS Modification – Added Digits  
ARS Dial Tone Pattern  
ARS Interdigit Time  
Removes digits before sending  
Adds digits before the dialled number  
Selects the Dial Tone generated  
Assigns the wait time for ARS  
Assigns the trunk group used by ARS  
361  
362  
-
-
-
-
363  
364  
ARS Trunk Group  
-
-
74  
74  
385 ~ 388  
389  
Itemised Bill by Extension  
Assigns the Bill code to each Extension  
BT Access Code  
75  
98  
76  
98  
359  
Station Program Clear  
Set by Extension user  
(Operating Instructions Page 1-7)  
99  
99  
999  
System Data Clear  
( 3 of 6 )  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NEW Programming Steps  
( with reference to the KX-T30810 / 61610 )  
Step Program Title  
Feature Description  
Default  
002  
System Password  
Replaces the PBX Programming Switch  
( Installation Manual Page 4 –3 )  
* #  
: System Prog  
1234 : Password  
008  
009  
Operator Assignment  
Assigns the System Operator Telephone  
Jack : 01  
Extension Number Assignment  
Allows the extension numbering scheme to be changed  
Jack 01 ( Ext. 201 )  
24 ( Ext. 224 )  
12 HOUR  
010  
011  
012  
100  
101  
102  
LCD Time Display Selection  
Speed Dial Number Set  
Alternative Feature Number Plan  
Hunt Group  
12 / 24 hour clock display options  
Used for Speed Dials and Call ID Feature  
Replaces feature with a code 50 ~ 59  
Not stored  
Not stored  
Enables Station Hunting for Extension Groups  
Assigns Hunting Type for Extension Groups  
All groups : Disabled  
All groups : Terminate  
Station Hunt Type  
Voice Mail Port  
Enables Jacks ( assigned as Voice Mail Ports )  
to send DTMF signalling to Voice Mail  
Enables signalling of Call Status information to  
Voice Mail ports ( busy, answered, ringing, etc. )  
Assigns Call Hold Mode for SLT extensions  
( Example - HOLD 1 : Recall + on-hook )  
Confirmation Tone sent at the Start and End  
of a Conference Call  
Allows locked extensions to send a Recall signal whilst  
talking to an external call  
Allows an extension, not programmed to ring  
[408 – 410]  
Jacks 07 / 08 / 15 / 16 :  
Disabled  
Disabled  
103  
104  
105  
108  
109  
Voice Mail Port  
DTMF Integration  
Hold Mode Selection  
HOLD 1  
Conference Tone  
Enable ( send )  
Disabled ( not allowed )  
Enable ( Allow )  
Recall Mode of a Station Locked  
Extension  
CO Indicator Assignment  
to receive the call by pressing the CO Line button  
Mode1: Sends Recall signal time ( Prog. Step 418 )  
Mode2: Recall signal is sent while the button is pressed  
Assigns External Music or Tone (Beep)  
110  
111  
112  
Recall Key Mode  
Mode 1  
Hold Music Selection  
External Music / Tone  
DSS Console Indication Mode  
( for FWD / DND )  
External Music  
Enable ( Flashing )  
Assigns if an extension set as FWD/DND  
shows as a flashing button on the BLF/ DSS  
115  
116  
117  
Extension Ringing Pattern Selection  
Conference Pattern Selection  
Call Pick-up Tone  
Sets Single / Double / Triple Ring Pattern  
Single  
Set the max. number of parties in a conference  
5 party (C-2 E-5)  
Enabled ( Tone )  
Confirmation tone sent  
when the Call Pickup feature is used  
118  
119  
Pulse Restriction  
Enables / Disables pulses being sent to the CO Line  
during a conversation  
( when Call Block is set in program step 401 )  
Allows Redial to use tone dialling on a pulse CO Line  
if the call had used * and # to convert to Tone  
Sets the Bell Frequency for an SLT device  
Enable  
Disable  
Redialling after Pulse / Tone  
conversion  
Bell Frequency  
120  
121  
122  
123  
124  
125  
126  
202  
25 Hz  
Automatic Line Access Number  
Auto Rotation of Line Access  
Break Ratio  
If set at ‘0’ Operator call becomes ‘9’  
Auto rotation of CO lines seized  
Dial 9  
Disabled (no rotate)  
Mode 1 (66%)  
Mode 2 (3 sec)  
Enable ( Check )  
Enable  
Sets the break ratio to CO lines  
SLT Ring Mode  
Length of SLT Ring Cycle  
Call Barring Check for * , #  
DSS Off-Hook Mode  
Call Forward Start Time  
Assigns if * and # are checked by the COS program  
Making Intercom call by pressing DSS key  
Call FWD no answer timer  
15 secs  
Options : 5 / 10 / 15 / 20 secs  
203  
206  
Pickup Dial Delay Time  
( Hot Telephone )  
Dial Start Time  
Auto Dial time delay  
Options : 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 secs  
Time between seizing a CO Line and digits being sent  
Range : 0 ~ 1500 milliseconds  
Sets the Range for Extensions - SLT  
3 secs  
0 mS  
207  
208  
Recall Timing Range  
Interdigit Time  
Mode 1 (50 ~ 180 mS)  
Maximum time allowed between digits when dialling  
out. Options : 5 / 10 / 15 secs  
20 secs  
(Prior to disconnection )  
210  
DTMF Time  
Assigns the minimum duration  
Mode 1 (80 mS)  
( 4 of 6)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NEW Programming Steps  
( with reference to the KX-T30810 / 61610 )  
Step Program Title  
Feature Description  
Default  
211  
No Dial Disconnection  
Call disconnects if 1st Digit is not dialled  
within 20 seconds of seizing a CO Line  
Sets maximum CO call time (Enabled Prog 613)  
Enable  
( disconnect )  
10 mins  
212  
213  
301  
CO Line Duration Limit  
Bell Off Detection  
Sets the wait time between bell signals from CO line  
3 secs  
Call Barring – System Speed Dial  
Boundary Class  
Assigns the call barring class for System Speed Dial  
Numbers  
Class 1  
309  
Emergency Dial Number Set  
Stored ‘Emergency’ telephone numbers override the  
following : ‘COS Level’ / ‘Account Code Modes’ /  
‘Electronic Extension Lock’  
Locations  
01 : 999 02 : 112  
03 ~ 05 : Not stored  
01 ~ 24 : Not stored  
i.e. 01 : 1234  
01 ~ 40 : Not Stored  
i.e. 01 : 1234567  
310  
311  
Account Codes  
Assigns Account Codes for ‘Verify - All’ mode  
Automatic Pause Insertion Codes  
40 codes can be assigned as Pause Codes.  
Pause [ duration prog. step 417 ] is inserted after the  
code  
312  
Call Barring – Extension Lock  
COS level applied to Locked Extensions  
Options : COS Levels 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / Disabled  
Defines connected CO’s  
Disabled  
400  
402  
CO Line Connected Assignment  
Pulse Speed Selection  
CO 1 ~ 6 : Connected  
10 pps  
Sets CO Line ‘Pulse Speed’  
Options : 10 / 20 pps  
404  
CO Line Group Assignment  
Trunk Group assignment of CO’s  
CO 1 : Trunk Group 1  
through to  
CO 6 : Trunk Group 6  
414  
to  
416  
Outside Line Mode  
( Day / Night / Lunch )  
NORMAL : Follows programming steps 408 ~ 410  
NORMAL  
DIL  
: Assigns one ext. to receive I/C CO call  
(must be used if Call FWD is required)  
DISA1  
DISA2  
UCD  
: The caller will hear a Tone or OGM  
: The caller will hear two different OGM  
: Call will be rec’d via UCD function  
417  
421  
Pause Time  
Assigns the Host PBX pause time  
1.5 secs  
Disable  
CPC Detection for Outgoing Calls  
Enables CPC detection during an outside call.  
If CPC is detected, the system disconnects the line  
( disconnection time Program Step 420 )  
Incoming CO Line ringing pattern  
Options : Single / Double / Triple Ring  
Detects CO Line reversal  
423  
CO Line Ringing Pattern Selection  
Reverse (Polarity) Check  
Double  
424  
500  
Disabled  
DISA Incoming Dialling Mode  
Selection - Auto Attendant  
DISA Built-in Auto Attendant  
Without AA System accepts : Ext. / Access No.  
Without AA  
With AA  
System accepts : Ext. / Access / AA No.  
501  
502  
503  
504  
505  
Assigns Auto Attendant numbers ‘0 ~ 9’  
to extension jacks  
Mode 1 ~ 6 DISA or UCD functions can be used  
to receive IC calls  
Assigns an extension to receive FAX calls  
when CNG is detected  
Assigns delay in DISA answering a call  
Options : 0 / 3 / 6 / 12 secs  
0 ~ 9 : Not stored  
i.e. 0 : Jack 01  
Mode 1  
OGM Mode Selection  
( KX-TA 62491 required )  
FAX Connection  
( KX-TA 62491 required )  
All Jacks : Disabled  
3 secs  
DISA Delayed Answer Time  
DISA Waiting Time after OGM  
Selects time the system waits for DTMF  
or CNG tone after OGM played  
5 secs  
Options : 0 / 5 / 10 / 15 secs  
506  
507  
508  
509  
510  
DISA Busy Mode  
Sets DISA response to a dialled busy extensions  
Options : Call waiting / Disconnect / play OGM 2  
Sets DISA response to unanswered calls  
Options : Disconnect / Intercept  
Sets DISA Intercept time for unanswered calls  
Options : 10 / 20 / 30 / 40 / 60 / 120secs  
Sets the ring time at the Intercept destination  
Options : 10 / 20 / 30 / 40 / 60 / 120secs  
Selects action taken by DISA if no response is received  
after OGM ( e.g. DTMF or CNG )  
Options : Intercept / Disconnect  
Disconnect  
Intercept  
20 secs  
DISA Intercept Mode  
Disconnect / Intercept  
DISA Ring Time before Intercept  
DISA Ring time After Intercept  
DISA No Dial Mode  
20 secs  
DISA1 : Intercept  
DISA2 : Intercept  
513  
Cyclic Tone Detection  
( OGM option KX-TA62491 required )  
Sets the number of times Cyclic Tone has to be detected 4 times  
before the system regards the call as complete  
Options : Disable ( does not detect ) / 2 / 3 / 4 times  
( 5 of 6 )  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NEW Programming Steps  
( with reference to the KX-T30810 / 61610 )  
Step Program Title  
Feature Description  
Default  
514  
Fax Tone Detection  
( KX-TA62491 option required )  
Sets the number of times the FAX / CNG tone has to be 1 Time  
detected  
Options : 1 / 2 Times  
515  
516  
517  
Intercept Time for Internal DISA  
DISA Incoming Assignment  
DISA AA Wait Time  
Sets intercept time for an internal DISA call  
Options : 3 / 6 / 9 secs  
Assigns which extensions can receive DISA calls  
3 secs  
All jacks : Enable  
(accept)  
Sets AA second digit wait time  
2 secs  
If no digit received within this time call is routed by  
program step 501. Options : 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 secs  
Assigns the wait time after answering  
519  
520  
521  
522  
523  
524  
525  
526  
600  
604  
605  
DISA Mute Time  
0 secs  
UCD Group  
Assigns the Extension Group for UCD  
Assigns the Time the UCD holds an IC call  
Assigns the Time between messages  
Group 1  
10 min  
UCD Busy Waiting Time  
UCD OGM Message Interval Time  
UCD Busy Mode  
1 min  
Assigns the operation after [521] Timer expires  
Assigns the operation when [525] Timer expires  
Assigns the UCD Extensions No Answer time  
Assigns the Ring time after intercept  
Intercept  
Intercept  
20 secs  
UCD Intercept Time  
UCD Ring Time before Intercept  
UCD Ring Time after Intercept  
Extension Groups  
20 secs  
All jacks : Group 1  
Not stored  
Option  
Sets Extension groups (used for Hunting)  
Assigns a name to an extension  
Extension Name Setting  
Account Code Entry Mode  
Option / Forced / Verify - All  
Verify – Toll  
Selects the Account code input mode  
Optional/Forced/Verify – All : Set if code must be used  
Verify – Toll : Temporarily changes COS to level 2  
Permits call transfer to a CO Line  
606  
607  
608  
609  
610  
Call Transfer to CO Line  
All jacks : Disabled  
All jacks : Disabled  
All jacks : Disabled  
All jacks : Disabled  
All jacks : Disabled  
Call Forward To CO Line  
Executive Busy Override  
Do Not Disturb Override  
Parallel Connection  
Permits calls to be forwarded to a CO Line  
Allows a call to barge an established call  
Permits the Do Not Disturb Override function  
Permits an SLT to be connected in parallel with a  
Proprietary Telephone  
611  
612  
TAM Extension  
( Telephone Answering Machine )  
Room Monitor Assignment  
Assigns TAM extension  
Allows Call Retrieval feature  
Assigns which jacks can be monitored by another  
proprietary telephone  
All jacks : Disabled  
All jacks : Disabled  
613  
614  
615  
706  
Exchange Line Duration Limit  
Internal Pulse Detection  
Limits the max. time for Extensions  
Disabled  
Disables Pulse Detection from Extensions  
Set the LCD Display language  
Enabled  
LCD Language Assignment  
Doorphone Ringing Tone / Pattern  
All jacks : English  
Triple  
Doorphone ringing pattern  
Options : Single / Double / Triple Ring  
Assigns if a tone is sent to the Doorphone when  
it is monitored  
Doorphone ringing time  
Options : 15 / 30 secs  
Door unlocked time  
Options : 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 secs  
Enables or disables SMDR printout for these numbers  
707  
708  
709  
803  
Doorphone Access Tone Selection  
Doorphone Ring Time  
Doorphones 1 ~ 4 :  
Enable (send tone)  
15 secs  
Door Opener Time  
Doorphones  
1 ~ 4 : 5 secs  
No printing  
Secret Speed Dialling / One Touch  
Dial Printing  
804  
805  
System Data Dump  
Outputs all System Data to SMDR  
SMDR Account Code Selection  
Sets SMDR Account Code printout  
CODE : Account code  
CODE  
INDEX : The two digit account code location  
806  
998  
SMDR Language Selection  
ROM Version  
Set SMDR Language  
English  
Confirms the System ROM version  
No Default  
( 6 of 6)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Milwaukee Saw 2429 20 User Manual
Multiquip Portable Generator DCA250SSIU User Manual
Murray Lawn Mower 405000x8B User Manual
NEC Computer Monitor FP1350 FP950 User Manual
Nokia Cell Phone 1110i User Manual
NuTone Fan QT150 User Manual
Oki Printer 6200n User Manual
Panasonic Power Supply EZAEG2A User Manual
Panasonic Security Camera GP KS822CU User Manual
Panasonic Vacuum Cleaner MC E455 User Manual